Panasonic KX-NCP500 Programming Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Panasonic Manuals
  4. PBX
  5. KX-NCP500
  6. Programming manual

Panasonic KX-NCP500 Programming Manual

Pure ip-pbx
Hide thumbs Also See for KX-NCP500:
1
2
3
4
Table Of Contents
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

See also: Pc Programming Manual , Feature Manual

PC Programming Manual

Pure IP-PBX
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000
Model No.
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200/KX-TDE600
Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Pure IP-PBX.
Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: PBMPR Software File Version 4.1000 or later
KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: PMMPR Software File Version 4.1000 or later
KX-TDE600: PGMPR Software File Version 4.1000 or later

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Panasonic KX-NCP500

Summary of Contents for Panasonic KX-NCP500

  • Page 1: Pc Programming Manual

    Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Pure IP-PBX. Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use. KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: PBMPR Software File Version 4.1000 or later KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: PMMPR Software File Version 4.1000 or later...

  • Page 2: Safety Notices

    Introduction About this Programming Manual The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic Pure IP-PBX. It explains how to programme this PBX using the Maintenance Console software. The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections: Section 1, Overview Provides an overview of programming the PBX.

  • Page 3: Pc Programming Manual

    • Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some countries/areas, or for some PBX models. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. • The PBX supports the Virtual 16-Channel SIP Trunk Card, and configuration of the card is done using the Maintenance Console.
  • Page 4 Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) Directive 1999/5/EC. Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available for download by visiting: http://www.doc.panasonic.de...

  • Page 5: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 Overview ....................11 Introduction ........................12 1.1.1 Introduction ........................12 1.1.2 Entering Characters .......................13 PC Programming ......................17 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console ............17 1.2.2 Password Security ......................22 2 Introduction of Maintenance Console ..........23 Introduction ........................24 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes .............24 2.1.2...
  • Page 6 3 [1] Configuration ..................107 [1-1] Slot .........................108 [1-1] Slot—Summary .....................114 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key ....................119 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) ..............122 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property ..................143 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command ............147 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port ...........148 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port—Connection Command ..150...

  • Page 7: Pc Programming Manual

    Table of Contents 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command ........309 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port ................310 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command ........332 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type ................333 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port ................344 3.39 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command ........353 3.40...
  • Page 8 Table of Contents 4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH ................591 4.21 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card ...................593 5 [3] Group ....................595 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings ................596 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority ..............604 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification ..................605 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan .......................610 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign ................612 [3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate ................613 [3-2] User Group ......................614 [3-3] Call Pickup Group ....................616...

  • Page 9: Pc Programming Manual

    Table of Contents [5-2] External Pager ......................816 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System .................817 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message ..............825 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM ..................828 [5-4] External Relay .......................833 [5-5] External Sensor ....................836 8 [6] Feature .....................839 [6-1] System Speed Dial ....................840 [6-2] Hotel & Charge ......................842 [6-3] Verification Code ....................852 [6-4] Second Dial Tone ....................855 [6-5] Absent Message ....................856...
  • Page 10 Table of Contents 14 Appendix ....................961 14.1 Revision History ......................962 14.1.1 KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx .......962 14.1.2 KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 4.1xxx .......964 14.1.3 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx .........966 14.1.4 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2.01xx .........967 14.1.5...

  • Page 11: Overview

    Section 1 Overview This section provides an overview of programming the PBX. PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 12: Introduction

    1.1.1 Introduction 1.1 Introduction 1.1.1 Introduction These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customise the PBX to your requirements.

  • Page 13: Entering Characters

    1.1.2 Entering Characters 1.1.2 Entering Characters The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or other text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX. Table 1 (Standard) PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 14 1.1.2 Entering Characters Table 2 (For CE model) PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 15 1.1.2 Entering Characters Table 3 (For RU model) PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 16 1.1.2 Entering Characters Table 4 (For GR model) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 17: Pc Programming

    1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console 1.2 PC Programming 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using the Maintenance Console. This section describes how to install and start the Maintenance Console. System Requirements Required Operating System •...
  • Page 18 Click OK to replace the country/area data of the PBX. Replacement may take several minutes to complete. Follow the procedure described in "3.13.1 Starting the PBX" (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000), "3.13.1 Starting the PBX" (for KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), or "3.15.1 Starting the PBX" (for KX-TDE600) in the Installation Manual and restart the PBX.
  • Page 19 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console When not using a DHCP server: Select Disable for the DHCP Client setting. For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200, type the IP address of the MPR card in the IP Address for IPCMPR Card box. For KX-TDE600, type the IP address of the MPR card in the IP Address for IPCEMPR Card box.
  • Page 20 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console PBX Web Manager It is possible to use a PC with the Maintenance Console (PBX Unified PC Maintenance Console) installed, as a Web server. This allows users to configure the PBX via a Web browser on a local client, or a remote PC through the Internet.
  • Page 21 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console At the login screen input the PBX’s IP address, port, and password. Any profiles using LAN connection that have been saved when accessing the Maintenance Console directly will be automatically displayed, for easy access to your PBX. Click Connect.

  • Page 22: Password Security

    1.2.2 Password Security 1.2.2 Password Security To maintain system security, system passwords are required to access certain programming functions of the PBX. By giving different users access to different passwords, it is possible to control the amount of programming that each user is able to perform. The following types of system passwords are available: Password Description...

  • Page 23: Introduction Of Maintenance Console

    Section 2 Introduction of Maintenance Console This section serves as reference operating instructions when using the Maintenance Console software to programme the PBX. PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 24: Introduction

    2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes 2.1 Introduction 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes Every time Maintenance Console is started, a dialogue box will appear. From here, you can enter any of the 2 available software modes. • Batch mode Batch mode allows you to create new system data files, and make modifications to system data files stored on your PC, without being connected to the PBX.
  • Page 25 IP address that was input in IP Address for IPCMPR Card (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/ KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IP Address for IPCEMPR Card (for KX-TDE600) of 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/ KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600). It is also possible to search for the IP address by clicking Search.
  • Page 26 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes Connection Setting for ISDN Remote Setting Values Explanation Dial Number 30 digits (consisting of 1-9, Enter the telephone number to be dialled to access the 0, *, #, -, and "," [comma]) PBX. PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 27: Access Levels

    2.1.2 Access Levels 2.1.2 Access Levels There are three main levels of access to the Maintenance Console: User, Administrator and Installer. Each level has its own Programmer Code, which must be entered to run the Maintenance Console. The allowed format for each programmer code is as follows: Item Length User Level Programmer Code...
  • Page 28 2.1.2 Access Levels File Menu Option Batch Interactive Close ü ü ü Save ü ü ü Save As ü ü ü Exit ü ü ü ü ü ü Disconnect Menu Option Batch Interactive Disconnect ü ü ü Tool Menu Option Batch Interactive SD memory backup...
  • Page 29 2.1.2 Access Levels Menu Option Batch Interactive ü ü Import®V-IPGW16 GW Settings Import®V-IPGW16 DN2IP ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü Export®Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID ü ü Export®Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table ü ü Export®ARS - Leading Digit ü...
  • Page 30 2.1.2 Access Levels Menu Option Batch Interactive Digital Trunk Error Report ü IP Extension Statistical Information ü CS Information ü PS Information ü CS Status Monitor ü Ping ü File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment®IP-CS ü ü File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment®NT400 ü...

  • Page 31: Software Interface

    2.1.3 Software Interface 2.1.3 Software Interface This section explains the functions of the various elements of the software interface. Main Window The window of the Maintenance Console software is divided into several areas, as shown below: Menu Bar Provides access to file management and connection options, as well as tools and utilities used in programming the PBX.
  • Page 32 2.1.3 Software Interface • File Contains the icon for saving files. For details, see Section 2.3.2 File—Save. • Tools Contains icons for backing up PBX data to the SD Memory Card, viewing extension information, and accessing Online Help. For details, see Sections 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup and 2.5.8 Tool —Extension List View.
  • Page 33 2.1.3 Software Interface Area Values Description PBX System Data Versionxxx-xxx Displays the version number of the system Version software installed to the PBX. The first 3 digits are the version number, and the last 3 digits are the revision number. PBX Region Code Regionxxx-xxx Displays the region code assigned to the PBX and...

  • Page 34: Card Status

    2.1.4 Card Status 2.1.4 Card Status Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in-service (INS) status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item. Card status changes can only be performed when the software is in Interactive mode (see 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes).

  • Page 35: Display Options

    2.1.5 Display Options 2.1.5 Display Options The View and Window menus provide options to control the display of items within the Maintenance Console. • View – Toolbar: Displays or hides the tool bar of commonly used buttons. – Statusbar: Displays or hides the bar at the bottom of the Maintenance Console window. –...

  • Page 36: Extension Number Setting

    2.1.6 Extension Number Setting 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of programming various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard window to make selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button.

  • Page 37: Programme Launcher

    2.2.1 Programme launcher—New 2.2 Programme launcher 2.2.1 Programme launcher—New Creates a new system data file, used to programme the PBX in Batch mode. All settings are in their initial or default state. This option is only available at Installer level. To upload the file created here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).

  • Page 38: Programme Launcher-Open

    2.2.2 Programme launcher—Open 2.2.2 Programme launcher—Open Opens a system data file previously saved on the PC, and enters Batch mode. When opening a file created with an older version of the Maintenance Console, you will be asked whether you want to convert the data for use with the current version or not. Using the data without converting may result in some data being loaded to an incorrect destination, and is not recommended.

  • Page 39: Programme Launcher-Connect-Rs-232C

    2.2.3 Programme launcher—Connect—RS-232C 2.2.3 Programme launcher—Connect—RS-232C Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the serial RS-232C interface of the PBX. This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary.

  • Page 40: Programme Launcher-Connect-Usb

    2.2.4 Programme launcher—Connect—USB 2.2.4 Programme launcher—Connect—USB Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through a USB port (USB Module) attached to the KX-DT300 series or KX-T7600 series DPT. To connect to the PBX by USB From the programme launcher, select Connect. The Login window will be displayed.

  • Page 41: Programme Launcher-Connect-Lan

    IP address that was input in IP Address for IPCMPR Card (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/ KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IP Address for IPCEMPR Card (for KX-TDE600) of 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/ KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600). It is also possible to search for the IP address by clicking Search.

  • Page 42: Programme Launcher-Connect-Modem

    2.2.6 Programme launcher—Connect—Modem 2.2.6 Programme launcher—Connect—Modem Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the modem. To access the PBX remotely using this feature, an RMT card must be installed and the Remote—Analogue Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number assigned in 13.1 [11-1] Main. This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary.

  • Page 43: Programme Launcher-Connect-Isdn Remote

    2.2.7 Programme launcher—Connect—ISDN Remote 2.2.7 Programme launcher—Connect—ISDN Remote Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode using the ISDN TA interface of the PBX. This method is only available when a user-supplied ISDN TA that supports CAPI 2.0 is used, and Remote —ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number of the 13.1 [11-1] Main screen is set.

  • Page 44: Programme Launcher-Connect-Profile Setup

    2.2.8 Programme launcher—Connect—Profile Setup 2.2.8 Programme launcher—Connect—Profile Setup Profiles are useful when one PC is used to connect to multiple PBXs. Rather than manually adjusting the connection settings each time a different PBX is accessed, it is possible to store the connection settings for several PBXs.

  • Page 45: File

    2.3.1 File—Close 2.3 File 2.3.1 File—Close Closes the system data file that is currently being modified, and returns to the programme launcher. To close a system data file • From the File menu, select Close. If the system data file has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed, giving you the option to save the file.

  • Page 46: File-Save

    2.3.2 File—Save 2.3.2 File—Save Overwrites the previously saved system data file with the system data currently being modified in Batch mode. To upload a file saved here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).

  • Page 47: File-Save As

    2.3.3 File—Save As 2.3.3 File—Save As Saves the system data file being modified in Batch mode with the name chosen by the user. To upload a file saved here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).

  • Page 48: File-Exit

    2.3.4 File—Exit 2.3.4 File—Exit Closes the Maintenance Console. To exit the Maintenance Console • From the File menu, select Exit. If the system data file being modified has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed, giving you the option to save the file. •...

  • Page 49: Disconnect

    2.4.1 Disconnect—Disconnect 2.4 Disconnect 2.4.1 Disconnect—Disconnect Closes the connection between the Maintenance Console and the PBX. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically backed up from the PBX to the SD memory card (see 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup). To disconnect From the Disconnect menu, select Disconnect.

  • Page 50: Tool

    2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup 2.5 Tool 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup Saves system data from the PBX to the SD memory card. Backup begins as soon as this option is chosen. To back up system data • From the Tool menu, select SD memory backup. PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 51: Tool-Bri Automatic Configuration

    2.5.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration 2.5.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration Automatically configures the network settings of the BRI card. This option is only available at Installer level. This tool automatically inputs values into the fields L1 Mode, L2 Mode, Access Mode, and Mode, on the Network tab of the 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port screen.

  • Page 52: Tool-Ndss Link Data Clear

    2.5.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear 2.5.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX. While this tool clears both monitor extension and monitored extension data, it only clears it at the connected PBX. To clear this data at other PBXs in the network, it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs.

  • Page 53: Tool-Dxdp All Ous

    2.5.4 Tool—DXDP All OUS 2.5.4 Tool—DXDP All OUS Sets the status of all DXDP/XDP extension ports to "OUS" simultaneously. To set all DXDP/XDP ports to OUS. From the Tool menu, select DXDP All OUS. Click OK. PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 54: Tool-Simplified Voice Message-Delete All Recording

    2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording 2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording Deletes all voice messages recorded by the SVM feature. To delete voice messages From the Tool menu, point to Simplified Voice Message and select Delete All Recording. Select the card from which to delete messages. Click OK.

  • Page 55: Tool-Simplified Voice Message-Check Current Usage

    2.5.6 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage 2.5.6 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage Displays information on the voice messages stored by the SVM feature. For each message, the type of message and the associated extension are displayed. To view SVM message status •...

  • Page 56: Tool-Call Pickup For My Group

    2.5.7 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group 2.5.7 Tool—Call Pickup for My Group Allows you to automatically configure settings in 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial and 6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial so that users can answer calls to their Call Pickup Group by pressing " 0". To activate this tool •...

  • Page 57: Tool-Extension List View

    2.5.8 Tool—Extension List View 2.5.8 Tool—Extension List View Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types. It is possible to sort the information according to Extension Number, Type, Extension Name, Shelf, Slot, or Port. There is also a key-word searching feature. The types that can be displayed are as follows: Type Detail...

  • Page 58: Tool-Import

    2.5.9 Tool—Import 2.5.9 Tool—Import Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level. The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using the Export tool (see 2.5.10 Tool—Export), or comma-separated value (CSV) files.
  • Page 59 2.5.9 Tool—Import ARS - Leading Digit Data Type Import Destination Location Leading Number Leading Digit Additional Number of Digits Additional Dial Digits Routing Plan Number Route Plan Number Related programming: 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number ARS - Except Code Data Type Import Destination Location Leading Number Exception...
  • Page 60 2.5.9 Tool—Import Quick Dial (Basic) Data Type Import Destination Location Dial Dial Phone Number Phone Number Related programming: 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Quick Dial (Expansion) Data Type Import Destination Location Dial Dial Phone Number Phone Number Related programming: 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial SIP Extension Data Type Import Destination...
  • Page 61 2.5.9 Tool—Import Data Type Import Destination Packet Sampling Time (G.729A) Packet Sampling Time (G.729A) Voice Activity Detection for G.711 Voice Activity Detection for G.711 FAX Detection Ability FAX Detection Ability DTMF DTMF Payload Type Payload Type Related programming: 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings V-IPGW16 DN2IP Data Type Import Destination...

  • Page 62: Tool-Export

    2.5.10 Tool—Export 2.5.10 Tool—Export Allows several types of system data to be exported to files. These files can be used with the Import tool (see 2.5.9 Tool—Import) to update another PBX. Except for ARS - Routing Plan, tables are exported as comma-separated value (CSV) files. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level.

  • Page 63: Tool-Screen Customize-User Level/Administrator Level

    2.5.11 Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level 2.5.11 Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level Allows you to specify which menu screens, tools and utilities can be accessed in User and Administrator levels. This option is only available at Installer level. Selected check boxes will be displayed on the main screen of the Maintenance Console and in the menu bar to users with the level of access being edited.

  • Page 64: Utility

    CSLC16, ECSLC24, CSIF, LCOT, ELCOT, T1, E1, BRI, PRI, OPB, E&M, DID, IP-EXT Card CT Bus diagnosis DHLC, DLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, CSLC16, CSIF, LCOT, T1, (KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/ E1, BRI, PRI, OPB, E&M, DID, IP-EXT KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 only) DTMF Receive test port DHLC, SLC8, SLC16, MSLC16, ESLC16, EMSLC16, CSLC16, ECSLC24, E&M, DID...
  • Page 65 2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis To perform a card test From the Utility menu, select Diagnosis. Click on the Status cell of the card to be tested, and set it to "OUS". Click on the cell showing the card type. A new window will be displayed. Select the Card Test option.
  • Page 66 2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis From the CO Line Port No. drop-down list, select the port number of the trunk you want to test. Click Test. The error report will be displayed. Select an option: • Click Capture if you want to save the displayed information. Enter a file name, or select a file to overwrite.

  • Page 67: Utility-File Transfer Pc To Pbx (Sd Card)

    Attempting to transfer any other type of file results in an error message. The names of all files that can be stored on the SD memory card are as follows: Main Programme KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card...
  • Page 68 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) LPR Programme Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card PCSINF CSIF PDHLC DHLC8, DLC8, DLC16 PSLC SLC8, SLC16 PCSLC CSLC16 E&M PBRI PIPGWH IP-GW4 PIPGW16 IP-GW16 PPRI23 PRI23 PPRI30 PRI30 POPB3 PDID DID8 PIPEXT IP-EXT16...

  • Page 69: System Data

    2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) System Data KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DBSYS IPCMPR DBSYS_S IPCMPR DBSYS-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX is saved as "DBSYS_S". KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 Name on SD Memory Card...
  • Page 70 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DBIDLC DLC8/DLC16 DBIBRI DBILCOT LCOT4 DBIT1 DBIE1 DBIOPB3 OPB3 DBIEIO DBIPRI23 PRI23 DBIPRI30 PRI30 DBISLCLC SLC16 DBIVIPGW V-IPGW16 DBIVSPGW V-SIPGW16 DBIVIPEX V-IPEXT32 DBIVSPEX V-SIPEXT32 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DMINI...
  • Page 71 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DMISLCLC SLC16 DMIDID DID8 DMIIPEXT IP-EXT16 DMIVIPGW V-IPGW16 DMIVSPGW V-SIPGW16 DMIVIPEX V-IPEXT32 DMIVSPEX V-SIPEXT32 KX-TDE600 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DGINI IPCEMPR DGIDHLC DHLC8 DGISLC SLC8, EMSLC16, ESLC16, CSLC16, ECSLC24...
  • Page 72 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card) To transfer files to the SD memory card From the Utility menu, select File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card). The dialogue box will be displayed. Select the file to upload. A window showing the upload progress will be displayed. While transferring files to the SD memory card, the PBX automatically renames them according to the header information.

  • Page 73: Utility-File Transfer Pbx (Sd Card) To Pc

    Copies system data files from the SD memory card installed in the PBX to the connected PC. This option is only available at Installer level. The files that can be downloaded from the SD memory card are as follows: File Name File Type DBSYS (KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000) System Data DMSYS (KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) DGSYS (KX-TDE600) $SYSERR Error Data $SYSERR1–$SYSERR9...

  • Page 74: Utility-Sd Card File View And Load

    The name, date and time of creation, and size of files are displayed. This utility can also display information on activation key files stored in the SD memory card. The effective date, IPCMPR-ID (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR-ID (for KX-TDE600), activation key type, number of activation keys, and expiration date of activation keys are displayed on the Detail screen.

  • Page 75: Utility-Sd Card File Delete

    Allows you to delete files from the SD memory card. This option is only available at Installer level. The following essential system files cannot be deleted by this utility: KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: PBMPR, DBSYS KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: PMMPR, DMSYS KX-TDE600: PGMPR, DGSYS To delete files from the SD memory card From the Utility menu, select SD Card File Delete.

  • Page 76: Utility-Message File Transfer Pc To Pbx

    2.6.6 Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX 2.6.6 Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the PC to the selected MSG/ESVM card/block mounted on an OPB/MPR card. This option is only available at Installer level. Note •...

  • Page 77: Utility-Message File Transfer Pbx To Pc

    2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC 2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC Transfers Outgoing Message (OGM) files from the MSG/ESVM card/block mounted on an OPB/MPR card to the PC. This option is only available at Installer level. Note •...

  • Page 78: Utility-Error Log

    2.6.8 Utility—Error Log 2.6.8 Utility—Error Log Collects and displays system error information. Whenever there is a system failure, the PBX stores the error code generated. The connected PC collects all of these codes, along with other information, and displays an explanatory error message. The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows: Button Function...
  • Page 79 • 4: Expansion Shelf 3 • YY: Slot number – KX-NCP500 (Physical slot): 00 to 05 (00: IPCMPR Card Slot/Built-in ESVM card; 01 to 05: Free Slots) – KX-NCP1000 (Physical slot): 00 to 07 (00: IPCMPR Card Slot/Built-in ESVM card; 01 to 07: Free Slots) –...
  • Page 80 2.6.8 Utility—Error Log To view the error log • From the Utility menu, select Error Log. PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 81: Utility-T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor

    2.6.9 Utility—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor 2.6.9 Utility—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor Displays reference signalling bit information for all channels of the T1 or E1 card, by monitoring sent and received A, B, C and D bits. This utility is intended for use by dealers. This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status.

  • Page 82: Utility-T1/E1 Line Trace

    2.6.10 Utility—T1/E1 Line Trace 2.6.10 Utility—T1/E1 Line Trace Traces the sent and received signalling bits and dial numbers on the specified channel of the T1 or E1 line. This utility is intended for use by dealers. This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status. To view trace data From the Utility menu, select T1/E1 Line Trace.

  • Page 83: Utility-Isdn/Qsig Protocol Trace

    2.6.11 Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace 2.6.11 Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace This utility collects protocol trace data from BRI, PRI or IP-GW cards, and displays it on the PC. This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target BRI, PRI or IP-GW card be set to INS status.

  • Page 84: Utility-V-Ipgw16 Protocol Trace

    2.6.12 Utility—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace 2.6.12 Utility—V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace This utility collects trace data of protocol activity from V-IPGW16 card. This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target V-IPGW16 card be set to INS status. To save trace data to the SD Memory Card From the Utility menu, select V-IPGW16 Protocol Trace.

  • Page 85: Utility-Digital Trunk Error Report

    2.6.13 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report 2.6.13 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital trunks. This option is only available at Installer level. The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the time period selected.

  • Page 86: Utility-Ip Extension Statistical Information

    From the Utility menu, select IP Extension Statistical Information. From the Card Selection drop-down list, select the slot number for the card. "IPCMPR (VoIP-DSP)" (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/"IPCEMPR (VoIP-DSP)" (for KX-TDE600) can be selected for the DSP card when DSP Card Status is enabled. See 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600).

  • Page 87: Utility-Cs Information

    2.6.15 Utility—CS Information 2.6.15 Utility—CS Information Displays information stored by the PBX regarding each Cell Station (CS). This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target CSIF, DHLC, DLC, or V-IPCS4 card be set to INS status. For DHLC/DLC cards, only the information for ports that have CSs connected to them is displayed.

  • Page 88: Utility-Ps Information

    2.6.16 Utility—PS Information 2.6.16 Utility—PS Information Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS). This option is only available at Installer level. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description PS No. PS location number. Only registered PSs will be displayed. Extension Number Extension number of the PS.

  • Page 89: Utility-Cs Status Monitor

    The displayed items for the Current Sync CS of each CS are as follows: Item Description CS Type Type of CS that each CS is currently synchronised with. Slot Type (for KX-NCP500/ Slot type (shelf) of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with. KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200)/ Shelf (for KX-TDE600) Slot Slot number of the CS that each CS is currently synchronised with.

  • Page 90: Utility-Ping

    2.6.18 Utility—Ping 2.6.18 Utility—Ping Performs a connection test on network devices. This function sends echo requests to a particular IP address across an IP network, and displays the result of responses and round-trip time. This option is only available when the Maintenance Console is in Interactive mode. To perform a Ping test Enter a specific IP address in the IP Address box.

  • Page 91: Utility-File Transfer Ftp To Ip Equipment-Ip-Cs/Nt400

    2.6.19 Utility—File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment—IP-CS/NT400 2.6.19 Utility—File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment—IP-CS/NT400 Displays a list of files on the FTP server, and allows you to update the programmes stored in IP-CSs and KX-NT400 IP-PTs. This option is only available at Installer level. It is possible to perform the update in 2 ways: •...

  • Page 92: Utility-File Transfer Ftp To Ip Equipment-Nt3Xx

    2.6.20 Utility—File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment—NT3xx 2.6.20 Utility—File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment—NT3xx Displays a list of files on the FTP server, and allows you to update the programmes stored in KX-NT300 series IP-PTs. This option is only available at Installer level. To perform an update From the Utility menu, select File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment, and then NT3xx.

  • Page 93: Utility-Card Software Timed Update

    2.6.21 Utility—Card Software Timed Update 2.6.21 Utility—Card Software Timed Update Updates programmes in the LPR cards (optional service cards with local processors) by comparing them with files found on the SD memory card on a preset schedule, and downloading newer files to the cards. This option is only available at Installer level.

  • Page 94: Utility-System Reset-Reset By The Command

    PBX. This option is only available at Installer level. Two copies of each of the main system files can be stored on the SD memory card. The names of these files are as follows: KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 File Name Description DBSYS Main system data file.
  • Page 95 2.6.22 Utility—System Reset—Reset by the Command Select this if you intend to use the current system data unchanged after reset. • Click Skip to continue without backing up. Select this if you intend to replace the current system data with data that was uploaded from the PC. The second screen will be displayed.

  • Page 96: Help

    KX-T7600 series DPT with a USB Module? • Is the USB driver on the PC running? To confirm, open the Windows Device Manager, and look for "Panasonic KX-TDA USB Main Unit driver" in the USB Controllers section. If it is not present, re-install the USB driver.
  • Page 97 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via modem. • Is the dial number of the modem correct? For more details, see 13.1 [11-1] Main. • Has a modem been installed to the PBX? •...
  • Page 98 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • This cannot be done, since the IP-GW4 card requires both channels of a port to be set to "OUS"/"INS" together. I cannot change an LCO port to INS status. • Is the card installed in the appropriate slot? •...
  • Page 99 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) I changed the FCO of a Portable Station, but the display of the Portable Station still shows the old FCO. • Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location. If I delete the extension number of a Portable Station, and then turn the Portable Station off and back on again, it does not function correctly.
  • Page 100 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • Perform the following steps: Confirm that the Numbering Plan you will change is not currently being used by any extensions (see 2.5.8 Tool—Extension List View). If it is being used by extensions, temporarily change the extension numbers of those extensions to that of another numbering plan, or delete the extension number (see 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings and 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings).
  • Page 101 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) I cannot change a feature number. • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items. The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by: •...
  • Page 102 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) • When you click Apply, the settings are updated in the PBX, but are not yet saved to the SD memory card. If system data is not saved to the SD memory card, the PBX will restore the data that was last saved to the card in the event that the PBX is reset, or power is turned off and back on again.
  • Page 103 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Setting Features How do I change the dialling mode of an analogue trunk? • From the 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port screen, change the Dialling Mode setting of the target port to "DTMF" or "Pulse", as required. How do I set disconnect detection (CPC Detection) for an analogue trunk? •...
  • Page 104 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) What programming do I have to perform to use a headset with an extension? • Headset OFF/ON on the 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port screen to "Headset ON". What programming do I have to perform to use XDP with an extension port? •...
  • Page 105 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) How do I set the queuing operation for an Incoming Call Distribution group? • Perform the following steps: On the 5.15 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table screen, set the actions as required for each queuing table. On the 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings screen, from the Queuing Time Table tab, select the number of the Queuing Time Table to use in each time mode.
  • Page 106 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 107: [1] Configuration

    Section 3 [1] Configuration PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 108: 1-1] Slot

    3.1 [1-1] Slot 3.1 [1-1] Slot The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed. Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a summary of status and MPR versions for all cards installed in the PBX, click the Summary button (see 3.2 [1-1] Slot —Summary).
  • Page 109 Click the IP Phone Registration button. Supported Card Types KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming IPCMPR: IP Convergence Main 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Processing Card IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/ 1 (fixed) KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) DHLC4: 4-Port Digital Hybrid KX-NCP500: 1 Extension Card KX-NCP1000: 1...
  • Page 110 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Interface Card KX-NCP1000: 4 Virtual IPCS For more information on the IPCMPR card, virtual cards and other optional cards, see the following sections in the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 Installation Manual: → 1.2.1 Optional Equipment → 3.3.1 IPCMPR Card →...
  • Page 111 3.1 [1-1] Slot Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card MSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Lamp Card Extension Type KX-TDE100: 6 SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone KX-TDE200: 8...
  • Page 112 Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming IPCEMPR: IP Convergence Main 1 (fixed in Slot 11) 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Processing Card IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/ KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card...
  • Page 113 3.1 [1-1] Slot Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming CSIF4: 4 Cell Station Interface Card None CSIF8: 8 Cell Station Interface Card ELCOT16: 16-Port Analogue Trunk 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Card LCO type DID8: 8-Port DID Card 3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only) BRI4: 4-Port BRI Card BRI8: 8-Port BRI Card...

  • Page 114: 1-1] Slot-Summary

    Indicates the type of service card installed in each slot of the physical shelf (reference only). Note that for MPR cards, the PBX model code is displayed in parentheses after the name. Value Range Card Type for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: DHLC4: 4-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card...
  • Page 115 3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary SLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card CSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card with Caller ID CSI/F: 8 or 4 Cell Station Interface Card LCOT16: 16-Port Analogue Trunk Card LCOT8: 8-Port Analogue Trunk Card LCOT4: 4-Port Analogue Trunk Card BRI8: 8-Port BRI Card BRI4: 4-Port BRI Card PRI23: PRI Card...
  • Page 116 3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only) 3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only) 3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway (KX-TDE series only) 3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only)
  • Page 117 3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References None IPCMPR Virtual Slot (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR Virtual Slot (for KX-TDE600) Indicates the slot number (reference only). Value Range 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot...
  • Page 118 3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary Value Range V-IPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel VoIP Extension Card V-SIPEXT32: Virtual 32-Channel SIP Extension Card V-IPGW16: Virtual 16-Channel VoIP Gateway Card V-SIPGW16: Virtual 16-Channel SIP Trunk Card V-IPCS4: Virtual 4 IP Cell Station Interface Card Maintenance Console Location 3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary Programming Manual References 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension...

  • Page 119: 1-1] Slot-Activation Key

    IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone activation key. The remainder is the number of IP-PTs that can be used through the IP Softphone/IP Proprietary Telephone activation key. At default, only IP softphones can be used. IPCMPR-ID (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR-ID (for KX-TDE600) Indicates the ID number of the MPR card (reference only).
  • Page 120 3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None The number of activated feature by—VoIP-DSP Card Indicates the number of channels provided by the DSP card (reference only). Value Range For DSP4/DSP16 card: IP Trunk (ch): 4 IP Proprietary Telephone (ch): 8 For DSP64 card: IP Trunk (ch): 16...
  • Page 121 3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key The number of activated feature by—Total Indicates the total number of channels (or CA users) provided by the DSP card and activation key files on the SD memory card (reference only). Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key Programming Manual References None...

  • Page 122: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Ipcmpr (For Kx-Ncp500/Kx-Ncp1000/Kx-Tde100/ Kx-Tde200)/Ipcempr (For Kx-Tde600)

    3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) The properties of the MPR card can be specified. LAN Setting DHCP Client Enables the DHCP Client function to assign IP address information automatically to the MPR card.
  • Page 123 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) IP Address for IPCMPR Card (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200)/IP Address for IPCEMPR Card (for KX-TDE600) Specifies the IP address of the MPR card. This parameter is only available for entering values when DHCP Client is disabled.
  • Page 124 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask address of the MPR card. This parameter is only available for entering values when DHCP Client is disabled.
  • Page 125 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Feature Guide References None Speed/Duplex for Main Port Specifies the connection mode of the main port. The connection is made in 100Mbps/half duplex when Auto Negotiation fails. Value Range Auto Negotiation...
  • Page 126 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) LAN Disconnect Decision Time Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before disconnecting LAN connection when no communication via the LAN is detected. Value Range 1–10 s Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR...
  • Page 127 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.4.5 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment VoIP-DSP Option DSP Card Type Indicates the type of the installed DSP card (reference only). Value Range...

  • Page 128: Ip Extension Count Of Bgm

    3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) IPCMPR-SVM TS Circuit Availability (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR-SVM TS Circuit Availability (for KX-TDE600) Specifies whether the built-in ESVM card of the PBX is enabled or disabled. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR...
  • Page 129 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Jitter Compensation Operation for G.711 Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for voice communications using the G.711 codec.
  • Page 130 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Jitter Compensation Operation for G.729A Enables the use of a jitter buffer feature for communications using the G.729A codec. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR...
  • Page 131 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Jitter Buffer Delay Init. for Voice Specifies the initial size of the jitter buffer for voice communications. Value Range 0–200 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR...
  • Page 132 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Value Range 0–200 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Jitter Buffer Delay Max. for FAX Specifies the maximum size of the jitter buffer for fax communications.
  • Page 133 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Feature Guide References None Jitter Buffer Adaptation Period for FAX Specifies the length of time that the jitter buffer is applied for fax communications. Value Range 1000–65530 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR...
  • Page 134 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CNG Signal Effective Detection Width 1 (ON) Specifies the length of time that the PBX detects the CNG signal.
  • Page 135 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) CNG Signal Fixation Detection Counter Specifies the number of times the CNG signal must be detected before the PBX proceeds the fax operation. Value Range 1–3 Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR...
  • Page 136 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T38 FAX Transmit Level (Network to PBX) µ-Law Specifies the transmission level of G3 fax signals after being converted from T.38 protocol packets, when the codec used is G.711µ.
  • Page 137 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) DSP CODEC G.711 only (IP-GW) Specifies whether or not to only use the G.711 codec for IP trunk calls. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR...
  • Page 138 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None LOGIN Port Number Specifies the port number used to login to the PBX via the LAN.
  • Page 139 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Built-in Communication Assistant Server Specifies the port number for the Communication Assistant (CA) application. Value Range 1024–65535 Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 9—...

  • Page 140: Dhcp Client

    3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DHCP DHCP Client Indicates the DHCP client function status of the MPR card (reference only).
  • Page 141 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Feature Guide References None IP Address for VoIP-DSP Indicates the IP address of the DSP card (reference only). Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR...
  • Page 142 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Maintenance Console Location 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None IPCMPR (for KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) Memory Version (KX-TDE series only) Indicates the hardware version of the IPCMEC card when it is mounted on the MPR card (reference only).

  • Page 143: 1-1] Slot-Opb3 Card Property

    3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property The properties of the built-in SVM (Simplified Voice Message) and OGM (Outgoing Message) features can be specified. To change the status of the built-in ESVM card, click Command. Only the following parameters can be set. Other parameters on this screen are only applicable for the Optional Base card.
  • Page 144 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Value Range In sub-slot 1–2: Reserve: No feature is installed. In sub-slot 3: ESVM2: Built-in ESVM card is installed. Maintenance Console Location 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Status Indicates the status of the feature type of each slot (reference only).
  • Page 145 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Status Indicates the port status of the built-in ESVM card (reference only). Value Range For sub-slot 1–2: Not applicable.
  • Page 146 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References 3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— SVM Feature Feature Guide References 1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) 1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) MSG Feature Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card as an MSG card (OGM feature). It is possible to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature, as an MSG card (OGM feature), or both.

  • Page 147: 1-1] Slot-Opb3 Card Property-Card Command

    3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command 3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command Commands for the built-in ESVM card can be programmed. Puts the feature in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.6 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None...

  • Page 148: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Virtual Ip Gateway Port

    3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port 3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port Various settings can be programmed for each virtual IP Gateway port. To change the status of virtual IP Gateway ports, click Command. Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).

  • Page 149: Call Distribution Port Group

    3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 150: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Virtual Ip Gateway Port-Connection Command

    3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port—Connection Command 3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port —Connection Command Commands for the virtual IP gateway ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References...

  • Page 151: 1-1] Slot-Shelf Property - Virtual Ip Gateway

    3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Common settings for all of the V-IPGW cards installed in the Virtual Shelf can be programmed. Main Gatekeeper Available Specifies whether to use a gatekeeper. This setting can only be changed when all V-IPGW cards are set to OUS.
  • Page 152 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Primary Gatekeeper IP Address Specifies the IP address of the primary gatekeeper. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway...
  • Page 153 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Secondary Gatekeeper IP Address Specifies the IP address of the secondary gatekeeper. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Secondary Gatekeeper Port Number Specifies the port number of the secondary gatekeeper.
  • Page 154 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Feature Guide References None RAS Port Number Specifies the port number for the H.225 protocol (RAS) in an H.323 protocol suite. Value Range 1–65535 Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 155 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None H.323 Dynamic Port Number Specifies the starting port number from which 448 contiguous ports are used as dynamic ports. Value Range 1–65000 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 156 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway RTCP Packet Interval Specifies the length of time until the PBX retries to send RTCP packets when no reply is received. Value Range 5–60 s Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 157 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Feature Guide References None RTP QoS-ToS Type Specifies the ToS type in the ToS field. Value Range Normal, Monetary Cost, Reliability, Throughput, Delay Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 158 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 48 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 159 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway...
  • Page 160 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway QSIG-CT Enables a call to be transferred to a destination extension at another PBX in a QSIG network. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 161: Outgoing Call

    3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Outgoing Call En-bloc Dialling setting Selects the call dialling mode. Value Range En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed telephone number is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.

  • Page 162: Incoming Call

    3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Overlap—Inter-digit Timer (T302-2) Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a dial number must be dialled. Value Range 1–10 s Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 163 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Voice Codec Priority 1st Specifies the highest priority codec type. For fax communications, it is necessary to specify G.711A or G. 711µ for this parameter. Value Range G.711A, G.711µ, G.729A Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 164 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Value Range None, G.711A, G.711µ, G.729A Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Packet Sampling Time for G.711A Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
  • Page 165 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Feature Guide References None Packet Sampling Time for G.729A Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 166 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833).
  • Page 167 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway T38 FAX UDPTL Error Correction – Redundancy Specifies whether to enable the redundancy feature when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 168 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Feature Guide References None T38 FAX Rate Management Method Specifies the rate management method when using the T.38 protocol. Value Range Transferred TCF, Local TCF Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 169 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message. Value Range 0–600 ´...
  • Page 170 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway T305 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message. Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 171 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Feature Guide References None T310 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a continuance message after receiving the Incoming Call Proceeding message. Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 172 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None T318 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message. Value Range 0–600 ´...
  • Page 173 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway T322 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 174 3.9 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 175: 1-1] Slot-Shelf Property - Virtual Ip Gateway-Gk Settings

    3.10 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GK Settings 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway— GK Settings Gatekeeper registration information can be programmed. Destination Number Specifies a telephone number to register with a gatekeeper. Value Range Max. 30 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 3.10 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GK Settings Programming Manual References...

  • Page 176: 1-1] Slot-Shelf Property - Virtual Ip Gateway-Gw Settings

    3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway— GW Settings The settings related to destination gateway devices can be programmed. The following parameters can be specified for a maximum of 100 destination gateway devices. Main GW Name Specifies the name of the destination gateway device for programming reference.
  • Page 177 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Value Range 1–256, None Maintenance Console Location 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection for IP-GW16 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature between the V-IPGW and KX-TDE/KX-TDA IP-GW cards.
  • Page 178 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Feature Guide References None Progress Tone Send Mode Specifies whether to send call progress tones to the destination. When selecting External, call progress tones are audible at the destination. Value Range External, Internal Maintenance Console Location 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings...
  • Page 179 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Value Range For 1st: G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A For 2nd and 3rd: None, G.711A, G.711Mu, G.729A Maintenance Console Location 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Packet Sampling Time (G.711A)
  • Page 180 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Packet Sampling Time (G.729A) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. Value Range 10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 181 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None FAX Detection Ability Enables the use of the FAX Detection Ability feature. Since fax signals using a codec other than G.711 cannot be received accurately at the destination, this feature automatically switches the codec to G.711 to enable end-to-end fax signal relay over the network.
  • Page 182 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Feature Guide References None Payload Type Specifies the payload type for DTMF tones using RFC2833. Programming this parameter is only necessary if DTMF is set to Outband (RFC2833). Value Range 96–127 Maintenance Console Location 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings Programming Manual References...

  • Page 183: 1-1] Slot-Shelf Property - Virtual Ip Gateway-Dn2Ip

    3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP 3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway— DN2IP The related settings of the address translation of telephone numbers and IP addresses can be programmed. Leading Number Specifies the leading digits in dialled numbers by which to associate calls with the appropriate destination. Value Range Max.
  • Page 184 3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP Maintenance Console Location 3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None GW Group Specifies the number of the destination gateway group. This setting is only available when GW No./GW Group Selection on this screen is set to GW Group.

  • Page 185: 1-1] Slot-Shelf Property - Virtual Ip Gateway-Hunt Pattern

    3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway— Hunt Pattern The related settings of hunt patterns can be programmed. The hunt pattern determines how to route incoming calls through virtual IP trunks to the PBX. A maximum of 32 hunt patterns can be programmed.

  • Page 186: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Virtual Ip Extension

    The properties of the V-IPEXT card can be specified. Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
  • Page 187 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension Value Range 1024–65535 Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPEXT card to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data.
  • Page 188 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) First Resending Time (PTAP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
  • Page 189 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Resending Time Out (PTAP) Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
  • Page 190 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension Resending Time Out (MGCP) Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Value Range 75–120 s Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 191 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 192 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension Maintenance Console Location 3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 193: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Virtual Ip Extension

    It is possible to de-register the IP-PT later. Preparation Open 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600), and confirm that the IP addresses of the MPR and DSP cards, subnet mask address, and default gateway address are set.
  • Page 194 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Click OK. A dialogue box will appear. Click Confirm. If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed". Click Close. Once the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "None". Main Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).
  • Page 195 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port.
  • Page 196 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Status Indicates whether a certain IP-PT is registered (reference only). Value Range None, Registered Maintenance Console Location 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 197 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Program Ver. Indicates the programme software file version of the IP-PT (reference only). Value Range Version number Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 198 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
  • Page 199 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: •...

  • Page 200: Ringing Tone

    3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Ringing Tone Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls. Value Range A: 64 ms (697 Hz), 64 ms (852 Hz) B: 32 ms (697 Hz), 32 ms (852 Hz) C: 128 ms (697 Hz), 128 ms (852 Hz) D: 32 ms (697 Hz), 96 ms (852 Hz) Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 201 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Maintenance Console Location 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Packet Sampling Time (G.729A) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.

  • Page 202: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Virtual Ip Extension-Connection Command

    3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension—Connection Command 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension —Connection Command Commands for the virtual IP extension ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension...

  • Page 203: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Virtual Sip Extension

    3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension The properties of the virtual SIP Extension card can be specified. UDP Port No. for SIP Extension Server Specifies the UDP port number used for the SIP Extension server. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
  • Page 204 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension Maintenance Console Location 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension SIP Location Hold Time Interval Specifies the interval time that the PBX waits before starting to hold information on location of SIP Extensions. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
  • Page 205 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension Echo Canceller Ability Specifies the echo canceller ability time. Value Range OFF, 48 ms, 128 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path.
  • Page 206 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension Feature Guide References 1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension EC Gain Specifies the Echo Canceller Gain. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension...

  • Page 207: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Virtual Sip Extension Port

    3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port Various settings can be programmed for each virtual SIP extension port. To change the status of virtual SIP extension ports, click Command. Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).
  • Page 208 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port Maintenance Console Location 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Password Specifies the password used for registering a SIP Extension to the PBX. While it is possible to enter a password manually for each SIP Extension, you can copy Extension Number to Password clicking Copy to button.
  • Page 209 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port Feature Guide References 1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the SIP Extension (reference only). Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 210 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port Maintenance Console Location 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension Packet Sampling Time (G.729A) Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound.
  • Page 211 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port Voice Activity Detection for G.729A Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.729A codec. This feature conserves bandwidth by detecting silent periods during a call and suppressing the packets of silence from being sent to the network. Value Range OFF, ON Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 212: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Virtual Sip Extension Port-Connection Command

    3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port—Connection Command 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port—Connection Command Commands for the virtual SIP extension ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port...

  • Page 213: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Virtual Ipcs

    The properties of the V-IPCS card can be specified. Signalling (PTAP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit and receive PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. This must be changed if another network application is using the same port.
  • Page 214 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS Value Range 1024–65535 Maintenance Console Location 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Voice (RTP) UDP Port No. (Server) Specifies the UDP port used by the V-IPCS card to transmit and receive RTP (Realtime Transfer Protocol) data.
  • Page 215 Feature Guide References None First Resending Time (PTAP) Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to resend PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value.
  • Page 216 Feature Guide References None Resending Time Out (PTAP) Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending PTAP (Panasonic Telephony Administration Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Value Range 150–240 s...
  • Page 217 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS Resending Time Out (MGCP) Specifies the length of time after which the PBX terminates resending MGCP (Media Gateway Control Protocol) data. To change the value displayed here, click Common Settings and set the desired value. Value Range 75–120 s Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 218 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 219 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS Maintenance Console Location 3.20 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 220: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Virtual Ipcs

    It is possible to de-register the IP-CS later. Preparation Open 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600), and confirm that the IP addresses of the MPR and DSP cards, subnet mask address, and default gateway address are set.
  • Page 221 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Click Confirm. If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed". Click Close. Once the IP-CS is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-CS will update to show "None". Main Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).
  • Page 222 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: •...

  • Page 223: Mac Address

    3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Feature Guide References None MAC Address Indicates the MAC address of the IP-CS (reference only). Value Range 00:00:00:00:00:00–FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Current IP Address Indicates the current IP address of the IP-CS (reference only).
  • Page 224 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Air Sync Group No Assigns an Air Synchronisation Group number to the IP-CS. Value Range None, 1 Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation Feature Guide References...
  • Page 225 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CS Name Specifies the CS name of the port. Value Range Max.
  • Page 226 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None IP Codec Priority Specifies the codec used for compression and decompression of transmitted data. Value Range G.711, G.729A Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 227 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Value Range 10 ms, 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 50 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Voice Activity Detection for G.711 Enables the use of the Voice Activity Detection feature for the G.711 codec.

  • Page 228: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Virtual Ipcs-Connection Command

    3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS—Connection Command 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS— Connection Command Commands for the virtual IP-CS ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.22 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.21 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IPCS Feature Guide References...

  • Page 229: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Extension Type

    3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type The property for the extension cards can be specified. KX-T7250 Transfer/Hold Key Mode Selects whether the control signals sent by the Transfer and Hold buttons on KX-T7250 PTs are reversed or not.
  • Page 230 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type Maintenance Console Location 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SLT Off Hook Guard Time Specifies the length of guard time used for off-hook signals from SLTs, to prevent the PBX mistaking them for pulse dials.
  • Page 231 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type SLT Pulse Minimum Make Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial. Value Range 8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 232: Slt Power Supply (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash Timing - Range Specifies the maximum length that a signal sent from an SLT can be for the PBX to recognise it as a hookswitch flash signal.
  • Page 233 SLC8 cards. Value Range None, Caller ID Maintenance Console Location 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type Installation Manual References For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: None For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 3.6.6 EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA0168) For KX-TDE600: 3.8.6 EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA0168) Programming Manual References...

  • Page 234: Hook Threshold Pd A-Law (Kx-Tde600 Only)

    Hook Threshold PD A-law (KX-TDE600 only) Specifies the current threshold (A-law) for switching from Power Save mode to an active state. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. This setting is only available when an ECSLC24 card is installed.

  • Page 235: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Extension Port

    3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Various settings can be programmed for each extension port. To change the status of extension ports, click Command. To view total numbers of each type of extension connected, click Port Type View.

  • Page 236: Telephone Type

    3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Maintenance Console Location 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration Port Type Indicates the port type (reference only). Value Range DPT: DPT port (DLC) SLT: SLT port (SLC/MSLC/CSLC) S-Hybrid: Super Hybrid port (DHLC) S-Hybrid(SLT): XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC)
  • Page 237 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Maintenance Console Location 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Programming Manual References 3.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View Feature Guide References 2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command as follows: •...
  • Page 238 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None XDP Mode Turns XDP mode on or off for the port.
  • Page 239 Value Range Normal: For connecting a DPT or CS DSS: For connecting a DSS Console (A maximum of 8 [with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200] or 64 [with the KX-TDE600] DSS Consoles can be connected to the PBX.) VM (DPT): For connecting a Panasonic VPS through DPT Integration PC Console: For connecting a PC Console (A maximum of 8 PC Consoles can be connected to the PBX.)
  • Page 240 SDN buttons will be deleted. If you do not wish to delete SDN buttons for this port, click Cancel. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: Location number for DSS Console: 1–64 Location number for PC Console: 1–8...
  • Page 241 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Guide References 1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group DPT Type—VM Port No. Specifies the VM port number for the port. This setting is only available when DPT Type—Type on this screen is set to VM (DPT). Value Range 1–12 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 242 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Maintenance Console Location 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.4 Headset Operation Ringing Tone Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls when Port Type on this screen is set to DPT, DPT(S-DPT), S-Hybrid, S-Hybrid(SLT), or S-Hybrid(S-DPT).

  • Page 243: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Extension Port-Connection Command

    3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— Connection Command Commands for the extension ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Guide References...

  • Page 244: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Extension Port-Port Type View

    3.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View 3.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Port Type View Displays the number of connected telephones and Cell Stations (CSs). This screen can only be accessed in Interactive mode. Type Indicates the types of telephone (reference only). Value Range New-DPT (KX-DT300 series/KX-T7600 series DPTs), Old-DPT (DPTs other than KX-DT300 series/ KX-T7600 series), APT, SLT, DSS Console, VM, Other, CS, High-density CS, IP-EXT, IP-PT, SIP...

  • Page 245: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Csi/F Port (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only) 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only) The status of the CSIF ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in-service) or OUS (out-of-service). To change the status of ports, click Command.
  • Page 246 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only) Maintenance Console Location 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Status Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: •...
  • Page 247 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only) Feature Guide References None Air Sync Group No Assigns an Air Synchronisation Group number to the CS. Value Range None, 1 Maintenance Console Location 3.27 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation Feature Guide References...

  • Page 248: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Csi/F Port-Connection Command (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only) 3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port— Connection Command (KX-TDE series only) Commands for the CSIF ports can be programmed. Puts the Cell Station (CS) in service. Value Range Not applicable.

  • Page 249: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Lco Type

    3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type The properties of the analogue trunk cards can be specified. Outgoing Guard Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Value Range 3–6 s Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 250 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Bell Detection—Bell Start Detection Timer Specifies the minimum length of a bell signal that can be recognised by the PBX as the bell signal sent from the telephone company, before the PBX detects an arriving call.
  • Page 251 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Pulse / DTMF Dial—DTMF Inter-digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly. Value Range 64 + 16 ´ n (n=0–11) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 252 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Guide References None Low Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a low speed pulse dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here.
  • Page 253 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Value Range Other, 60 %, 67 % Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Guide References None High Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a high speed pulse dial.

  • Page 254: Caller Id—Caller Id Signalling

    3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References None Pulse Type Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area. Value Range Normal, Sweden, New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 255 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Max Receive Time Specifies the maximum number of Caller ID series that are sent from the network. Value Range 0 (no limit), 1, 2, 3 Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 256 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Value Range Length + Timer, Timer Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Header Examination Enables the PBX to check the header of received Caller ID information. To enable this setting, Caller ID—...
  • Page 257 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Timer Specifies the total time required by the PBX to detect Caller ID information. To enable this setting, Caller ID—Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK. Value Range 80 ´...
  • Page 258 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Value Range None, *, #, A, B, C, D Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 259 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Caller ID—Caller ID Header[03] Selects the type of the 3rd header in a Caller ID signal. Value Range DDN, Caller ID Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID...
  • Page 260 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 1.26.3 Call Charge Services Pay Tone—Pay Tone Pulse - MIN Specifies the minimum length that a received pay tone signal must be for the PBX to recognise it as a pay tone signal.
  • Page 261 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Maintenance Console Location 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.3 Call Charge Services Pay Tone—Sending Flash while end talk Enables the PBX to send a flash signal at the end of call to demand a pay tone signal. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 262: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Lco Port

    3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Various settings can be programmed for each analogue trunk port. To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 263 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: •...

  • Page 264: Dialling Mode

    3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Guide References 1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out Dialling Mode Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the analogue trunk. Value Range DTMF, Pulse Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 265 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Speed Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the analogue trunk. Value Range Low, High Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 266: Pause Time

    3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Caller ID Detection Enables the PBX to detect a Caller ID signal from the analogue trunk. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Programming Manual References 3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID...

  • Page 267: Flash Time

    3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Guide References 1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion 1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) 1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal. Value Range None, 16 ´...

  • Page 268: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Lco Port-Connection Command

    3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Connection Command Commands for the LCO ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Guide References...

  • Page 269: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Bri Type/Pri Type

    3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type The properties of the BRI or PRI card can be specified. ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T200 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´...
  • Page 270 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T301 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN. Value Range 0–18000 ´...
  • Page 271 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 272 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T308 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after receiving the Release message from ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´...
  • Page 273 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T313 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message.
  • Page 274 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Feature Guide References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T318 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Resume message. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 275 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D3 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode. Value Range 0–3000 ´...
  • Page 276 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension—T201 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after resending the TEI check request to ISDN. Value Range 0–600 ´...
  • Page 277 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN Extension—T301 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN. Value Range 0–18000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 278 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension—T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending. Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 279 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension—T307 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX maintains a suspended call, before restarting. Value Range 0–6000 ´...
  • Page 280 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension—T309 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call. Value Range 0–3000 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 281 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension—T316 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message. Value Range 0–3000 ´...
  • Page 282 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type ISDN Extension—T322 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Status enquiry message. Value Range 0–600 ´ 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 283 3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 284: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Bri Port

    3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Various settings can be programmed for each BRI port. To change the status of ports, click Command. Main Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 285 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
  • Page 286 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None LLC Information Enables the PBX to send LLC (Low Level Compatibility) information to the network when an outgoing call is made when the ISDN bearer mode is speech.
  • Page 287 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Status Receive Selects what happens to a call when the Status Message from the network does not match the actual status of the call. Value Range Ignore: Ignore the Status Message from the network. Disconnect: Disconnect the call.
  • Page 288 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 289 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: • Click the desired cell in the column. •...
  • Page 290 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Outgoing Call Type Selects the method used to send dialled digits to the network. Value Range En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling.
  • Page 291 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY BRI Data Link (P-MP) Mode Assigns one or two TEIs (Terminal Endpoint Identifier) to the BRI CO port. To use the ISDN Hold supplementary service with point-to-multipoint configuration, this parameter should be set to 2-link in some countries/areas.
  • Page 292 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port ISDN Extension Parameters for ISDN Extension are not applicable for BRI ports assigned as CO ports. Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 293 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
  • Page 294 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension ISDN TE Power Enables the PBX to supply power to the ISDN TE (Terminal Equipment). This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to Extension. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 295 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension Network Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 296 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.

  • Page 297: Network Type

    3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Network Type...
  • Page 298 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY L2 Mode Selects the active mode of L2 (Layer 2) on the BRI port. Value Range Call, Permanent Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 299 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Network Numbering Plan Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 300 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
  • Page 301 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Trunk Property...
  • Page 302 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References None Calling Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private Selects the type of number that applies to outgoing trunk calls routed through public or private networks. Value Range Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 303 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Supplementary Service Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 304 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
  • Page 305 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used.
  • Page 306 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 307 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX. ISDN extensions can belong to an incoming call distribution group or idle extension hunting group. In this case, an MSN can be assigned.
  • Page 308 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port CCBS Type Selects the type of the call from the network initiated by the CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber) feature, from which the specified number of digits are deleted. CCBS Delete Digits on this screen specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number. Value Range ALL, Unknown, International, National, Network specific, Subscriber, Abbreviated Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 309: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Bri Port-Connection Command

    3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port— Connection Command Commands for the BRI ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References...

  • Page 310: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Pri Port

    3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Various settings can be programmed for each PRI port. Main Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 311 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Note • Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
  • Page 312 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Status Message Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network. Value Range No Transmission: Status Message is not sent.
  • Page 313 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References None CRC4 Mode Enables the use of CRC4 for error checking. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is an error checking control technique that uses a specific binary prime divisor that results in a unique remainder. It is usually a 16- to 32-bit character.
  • Page 314 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CO Setting CO Setting parameters are not applicable to ports assigned as Extension in Port Type. Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
  • Page 315 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type.
  • Page 316 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: • Click the desired cell in the column. • Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
  • Page 317 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Outgoing Call Type Selects the method used to send dialled digits to the network. Value Range En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling.
  • Page 318 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Networking Data Transfer Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 319 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 320 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the type of the port. Note • Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.

  • Page 321: Network Configuration

    3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References None Ring Mode (ISDN MSN Last No. 0 or 00) Selects the ring mode when receiving an incoming call with an MSN ending with "0" or "00". Value Range Ring All Extension for MSN: Ring all ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN. Ring AN Extension for MSN: Ring only one of the ISDN extensions that are addressed with MSN.
  • Page 322 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 323 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: • Click the desired cell in the column. •...
  • Page 324 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Network Numbering Plan Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).
  • Page 325 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Note • Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
  • Page 326 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of the port. Value Range Public: Public network VPN: Virtual Private Network Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 327 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Value Range Unknown, International, National, Network, Subscriber Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Called Party Number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks. Value Range Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 328 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References None Supplementary Service Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot...
  • Page 329 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Note • Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
  • Page 330 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY Specifies whether each ISDN or QSIG supplementary service is used.
  • Page 331 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Value Range ALL, Unknown, International, National, Network specific, Subscriber, Abbreviated Maintenance Console Location 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) CCBS Delete Digits Specifies the number of digits to delete from the received number when receiving a call of the specified type initiated by the CCBS feature from the network.

  • Page 332: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Pri Port-Connection Command

    3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command Commands for the PRI ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port Feature Guide References...

  • Page 333: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - T1 Type

    3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type The properties of the T1 card can be specified. Line Coding Selects the line coding type of T1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) used. Value Range B8ZS, AMI Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 334 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None LIU Send Option Selects the transmitting level (Transmit Pulse Amplitude) of LIU. Value Range Mode-1–Mode-8 Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 335 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type First Dial Timer (CO) Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a trunk, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
  • Page 336 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Wink Signal Width Specifies the length of a wink signal. Value Range 32 ´ n (n=4–9) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 337 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type DTMF Tone—DTMF Transmit Specifies the volume of the DTMF tone to be transmitted. Value Range 3-n (n=0–15) dB Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DTMF Tone—DTMF Receive Specifies the volume of the DTMF tone to be received.
  • Page 338 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse Type Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area. Value Range Normal, Sweden, New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 339 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Maximum BREAK Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial. Value Range 8 ´...
  • Page 340 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Feature Guide References None Flash—Flash Signal Detection (OPX) Enables the PBX to detect hookswitch flash signals from an SLT connected to an OPX. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 341 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash—Flash Signal Detection (TIE) Enables the PBX to detect a hookswitch flash signal sent from a TIE line. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 342 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Flash—Flash Width (TIE) Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal received from a TIE line that the PBX can recognise as a hookswitch flash signal. Value Range 8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 343 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Value Range *, #, A–D Maintenance Console Location 3.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type Programming Manual References...

  • Page 344: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - T1 Port

    3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Various settings can be programmed for each T1 channel. To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 345 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Maintenance Console Location 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the channel status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command: •...
  • Page 346 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) CO Dial Mode Selects the type of signal used to dial out to a trunk. Value Range DTMF, Pulse Maintenance Console Location 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 347 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Private: Use the TIE line service between two or more PBXs. Maintenance Console Location 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY 1.30.1 TIE Line Service CPC Signal Detection (DID)—Outgoing, Incoming...
  • Page 348 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection DTMF Width Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the T1 channel. Value Range 80 ms, 160 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 349 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Value Range 64 ´ n (n=1–128) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Start Signal Type Selects the type of the start signal. Value Range Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires.
  • Page 350 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Feature Guide References None Receiving Caller ID from TIE Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when the channel type is TIE. Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 351 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Maintenance Console Location 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause. Value Range 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s Maintenance Console Location 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 352 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Value Range 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s Maintenance Console Location 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Programming Manual References None...

  • Page 353: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - T1 Port-Connection Command

    3.39 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command 3.39 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command Commands for the T1 channels can be programmed. Puts the channel in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.39 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port Feature Guide References...

  • Page 354: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - E1 Type

    3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type The properties of the E1 card can be specified. To adjust related settings, click Line Signal Setting, MFC-R2 Setting 1, and MFC-R2 Setting 2. Line Coding Selects the line coding type of E1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the E1 card.
  • Page 355 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Maintenance Console Location 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None First Dial Timer (DDI/DID/TIE) Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DDI/DID or TIE line, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX.
  • Page 356 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Seizure ACK Wait Timer Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for the seizure ACK signal. Value Range 0.5 ´ n (n=1–20) s Maintenance Console Location 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 357 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Feature Guide References None RAI Signal Detection Mode Selects the RAI signal detection mode. Value Range Type 1, Type 2 Maintenance Console Location 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None...
  • Page 358 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Maintenance Console Location 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse Type Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area. Value Range Normal, Sweden, New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type...
  • Page 359 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Pulse Dial—CO Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 360 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash—Flash Detection Enables the PBX to detect a hookswitch flash signal sent from an E1 line. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 361 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Value Range 8 ´ n (n=3–191) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Caller ID—Caller ID Start Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series. Value Range *, #, A–D Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 362 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Value Range *, #, A–D Maintenance Console Location 3.40 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None...

  • Page 363: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - E1 Type-Line Signal Setting

    3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting DR2 Setting Type Selects the control type of the DR2 (Digital System R2) signal. Value Range Normal, Option-1, Option-3 Maintenance Console Location 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 364 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Maintenance Console Location 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Bit Position for Clear Back Selects the position of the clear-back signal control bit in a DR2 signal. Value Range A-bit, B-bit, A&B-bit Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 365 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Forced Release Pattern Selects the bit pattern for a forced release signal. Value Range A=0/B=0, A=0/B=1, A=1/B=0, A=1/B=1 Maintenance Console Location 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None...
  • Page 366 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Feature Guide References None E&M-P Pulse Length—Seizure Specifies the length of a seizure signal. Value Range 150 ms, 600 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 367 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None E&M-P Pulse Length—E&M-P Seizure ACK Specifies whether the PBX waits for an E & M-P seizure ACK signal. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 368 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Value Range A-bit, B-bit, C-bit, D-bit Maintenance Console Location 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Meter Pulse Detection—Length Specifies the length that a call charge meter pulse must be for the PBX to recognise it as a call charge meter pulse.
  • Page 369 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Feature Guide References None DSP Gain Adjustment—DTMF Receive Specifies the strength range within which a DTMF signal must be for the DSP to recognise it as a DTMF signal. Value Range -42 - 0 dB –...
  • Page 370 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Maintenance Console Location 3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Frame Error Detection—Error Detection Specifies whether the PBX detects frame synchronisation errors. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 371: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - E1 Type-Mfc-R2 Setting 1

    3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 ANI Service—Mode Selects the ANI (Automatic Number Identification) service mode. Value Range None: ANI service is not activated. Incoming call only: Receives the caller’s number from the E1 line. Outgoing call only: Sends the caller’s number to the E1 line.
  • Page 372 3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Maintenance Console Location 3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None MFC-R2 Timer—Backward Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC-R2 backward signal sent from the telephone company.
  • Page 373 3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Group-l Code Assignment—ANI Start Specifies the code used to indicate the beginning of an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 374 3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-l Code Assignment—End of Digit Specifies the code used to recognise the end of each digit in an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References...
  • Page 375 3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Value Range 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-ll Code Assignment—G-ll Code Incoming Call [1]–[15] Specifies the destination of incoming trunk calls for each Group-ll code respectively. Value Range Undefined, Subscriber, Operator, Collect Call Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 376 3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Feature Guide References None MFC-R2 Group-1[*][#]—E1 MFC-R2 Group1[*] code Specifies the code value of the Group-1 code when the received Group-1 code is [*]. Value Range 11–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 377: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - E1 Type-Mfc-R2 Setting 2

    3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Group-A Code Assignment—Address Complete Specifies the address complete (completion of dial reception) code sent to the telephone company. Value Range 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 378 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-A Code Assignment—ANI (N+1) Additional Code Specifies the second code when two codes are needed to request the telephone company to send the (N+1)th digit of an ANI number.
  • Page 379 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-A Code Assignment—(N) Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N)th digit of an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 380 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Feature Guide References None Group-A Code Assignment—(N-2) Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-2)th digit of an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 381 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Maintenance Console Location 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-B Code Assignment—Idle (2) Specifies the code used in special circumstances, such as an international call, to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is idle.
  • Page 382 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Group-B Code Assignment—Busy Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is busy. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 383 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Feature Guide References None Group-B Code Assignment—Out-of-Service Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is out of service. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References...
  • Page 384 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Maintenance Console Location 3.43 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 385: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - E1 Port

    3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Various settings can be programmed for each E1 channel. To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 386 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Maintenance Console Location 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the channel status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command: •...
  • Page 387 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Channel Type Selects the channel type. Value Range Undefined: Not assigned DR2: Digital System R2 E&M-P: Pulsed E & M E&M-C: Continuous E & M Maintenance Console Location 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 388 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Value Range DTMF, Pulse, MFC-R2 Maintenance Console Location 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection 1.22.1 E1 Line Service E1 Receiver Type Selects the type of signal the PBX receives from the E1 line.
  • Page 389 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CPC Detection Time—Out, In Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line. When None is selected here, the line will not be disconnected when a CPC signal is not detected.
  • Page 390 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Value Range 10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s Maintenance Console Location 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection Wink Signal Time-Out Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits to receive a wink signal after seizing a trunk. If a wink signal is not received before this timer expires, the trunk is released.
  • Page 391 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Feature Guide References None Sending Caller ID to TIE Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when Channel Type on this screen is set to E&M-P or E&M-C. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 392 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Maintenance Console Location 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Dial Tone to Extension Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the tone. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 393 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause. Value Range 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s Maintenance Console Location 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion 1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) 1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code...
  • Page 394 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 395: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - E1 Port-Connection Command

    3.45 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Connection Command 3.45 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Connection Command Commands for the E1 channels can be programmed. Puts the channel in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.45 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 3.44 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Feature Guide References...

  • Page 396: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Em Type (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only) 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only) The properties for the E & M card can be specified. Interface Selects E & M signal type. Value Range Continuous, Pulsed with Answer, Pulsed without Answer, Continuous No Answer Maintenance Console Location 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only)
  • Page 397 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only) Value Range 32 ´ n (n=1–255) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Inter-digit Timer Specifies the pseudo-answer time.
  • Page 398 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only) Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial. Value Range 60 %, 67 % Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 399 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only) Maintenance Console Location 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled.
  • Page 400 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only) Pulse Dial—Pulse Minimum MAKE Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial. Value Range 8 ´ n (n=1–5) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 401 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only) Feature Guide References None Flash—Flash Width Specifies the maximum length of a hookswitch signal sent from an SLT that can be recognised by the PBX as a flash signal. Value Range 8 ´...
  • Page 402 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only) Maintenance Console Location 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Clear Selects the length of a clear pulse. Value Range 150 ms, 600 ms Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 403 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only) Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Wink Signal Width Specifies the length of a wink signal. Value Range 32 ´ n (n=4–9) ms Maintenance Console Location 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 404 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only) Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Value Range *, #, A–D Maintenance Console Location 3.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References...

  • Page 405: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Em Port (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only) 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only) Various settings can be programmed for each E & M channel. To change the status of channels, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
  • Page 406 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only) Maintenance Console Location 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the channel status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command: •...
  • Page 407 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only) Feature Guide References 1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY 1.30.1 TIE Line Service Dialling Mode Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the E & M line. Value Range DTMF, Pulse Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 408 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only) Maintenance Console Location 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CO Pulse Speed Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the E & M line. Value Range 10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 409 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only) Start Signal Type Selects the type of the start signal. Value Range Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires. Wink: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received. Maintenance Console Location 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References...
  • Page 410 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Receiving Caller ID from TIE Specifies whether Caller ID information is received when Trunk Property on this screen is set to Private. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 411 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only) Maintenance Console Location 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause. Value Range 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s Maintenance Console Location 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only)
  • Page 412 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only) Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Value Range 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s Maintenance Console Location 3.47 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References...

  • Page 413: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Em Port-Connection Command (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.48 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only) 3.48 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only) Commands for the E & M channels can be programmed. Puts the channel in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.48 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References...

  • Page 414: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Did Type (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only) 3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only) The property for the DID card can be specified. First Dial Timer Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DID line, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX.
  • Page 415 3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only) Value Range 60 %, 67 % Maintenance Console Location 3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse Type Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.
  • Page 416 3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only) Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse Feed Back Tone Specifies whether the pulse feedback tone is turned on or not. For outgoing trunk calls, audible tones can be heard as the dialled number is sent out, which informs the extension user that the number has been dialled. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 417 3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only) Maintenance Console Location 3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Line Signal Setting—Wink Signal Width Specifies the length of a wink signal. Value Range 32 ´...
  • Page 418 3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only) Caller ID—Caller ID Information End Code Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series. Value Range *, #, A–D Maintenance Console Location 3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 419: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Did Port (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only) 3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only) Various settings can be programmed for each DID port. To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
  • Page 420 3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only) Maintenance Console Location 3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: •...
  • Page 421 3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only) Feature Guide References 1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection DTMF Width Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the DID line. Value Range 80 ms, 160 ms Maintenance Console Location 3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 422 3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only) Maintenance Console Location 3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Start Signal Type Selects the type of the start signal. Value Range Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires.
  • Page 423 3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only) Sending Caller ID to CO Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent to an analogue trunk. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 424 3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only) Feature Guide References None Dial Tone to Extension Enables the PBX to send a dial tone to an extension making a call when the network cannot send the tone. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)
  • Page 425 3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only) Maintenance Console Location 3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Value Range 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 426: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Did Port-Connection Command (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.51 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only) 3.51 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port— Connection Command (KX-TDE series only) Commands for the DID ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.51 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References...

  • Page 427: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Ip Gateway (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway (KX-TDE series only) 3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway (KX-TDE series only) The properties of the VoIP Gateway card can be specified. En-bloc Dialling setting Selects the call dialling mode. Value Range En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling.
  • Page 428 3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway (KX-TDE series only) When using the Centralised VM feature, set this to "No". Value Range Yes, No Maintenance Console Location 3.52 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG...

  • Page 429: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Ip-Gw Port (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.53 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port (KX-TDE series only) 3.53 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port (KX-TDE series only) Status of the IP-GW ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in service) or OUS (out of service). To change the status of ports, click Command.
  • Page 430 3.53 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port (KX-TDE series only) Maintenance Console Location 3.53 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: •...

  • Page 431: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Ip-Gw Port-Connection Command (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.54 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only) 3.54 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port— Connection Command (KX-TDE series only) Commands for the IP-GW ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.54 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References...

  • Page 432: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Ip Extension (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only) 3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only) The properties of the VoIP Extension card can be specified. To adjust settings related to IP-PT network data transmission, click Common Settings (see 3.56 [1-1] Slot— Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings (KX-TDE series only)).
  • Page 433 3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only) Value Range 0.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References 3.56 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings (KX-TDE series only) Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Keep Alive Time Out...
  • Page 434 3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) DSP Digital Gain (Down) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the down voice path. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References...
  • Page 435 3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only) Maintenance Console Location 3.55 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) NLP Setting Specifies the NLP (Non-Linear Processor) setting to control echo sound quality. Value Range Disable, Weak Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 436: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Ip Extension-Common Settings (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.56 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings (KX-TDE series only) 3.56 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension— Common Settings (KX-TDE series only) IP-PT network data transmission settings can be programmed. To activate any changes made to settings on this screen, it is necessary to set all installed IP-EXT cards to OUS, then back to INS. Gateway Address Specifies the default gateway address of the network for IP-PTs.
  • Page 437 3.56 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings (KX-TDE series only) For voice communications, an IP-PT uses 128 contiguous UDP ports, starting from the port number specified here. Value Range 1024–65472 Maintenance Console Location 3.56 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 438: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Ip-Extension Port (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) 3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) Various settings can be programmed for each IP extension port. To change the status of extension ports, click Command. IP-PT Registration and De-registration An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used.
  • Page 439 3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) Highlight numbers and names and click the right arrow to select them for forced de-registration. Click Next. A dialogue box will appear. Click OK. A dialogue box will appear. Click Confirm. If the de-registration is successful, the dialogue box will show "Forced De-registration Succeed".
  • Page 440 3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the port.
  • Page 441 3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Status Indicates whether a certain IP-PT is registered (reference only). Value Range None, Registered Maintenance Console Location 3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 442 3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) Maintenance Console Location 3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.4 Headset Operation 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Ringing Tone Selects the dual-tone switching pattern of the ring tone for incoming calls.
  • Page 443 3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) Packet Sampling Time Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. When IP Codec on this screen is set to G.711, only 20 ms and 30 ms are available. Value Range 20 ms, 30 ms, 40 ms, 60 ms Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 444: 1-1] Slot-Opb3 Card Property

    3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property 3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property The properties of the Optional Base card can be specified. To change the status of slots on the OPB card, click Command. The properties of the built-in SVM (Simplified Voice Message) and OGM (Outgoing Message) features can also be specified on this screen.
  • Page 445 EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card ESVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Installation Manual References For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: 1.2.1 Optional Equipment For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1.2.1 Optional Equipment For KX-TDE600: 1.2.1 Optional Equipment...
  • Page 446 3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property • Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command. Value Range INS: The card is in service. OUS: The card is out of service. Fault: The card has been removed from the sub-slot, or is not communicating with the PBX. Pre-Install: There is no card in the sub-slot, but the card type is programmed for the sub-slot.

  • Page 447: Device Type

    3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Device Type Selects the type of connected output device (for output ports only). Value Range Relay, Ringer Maintenance Console Location 3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.10 External Relay Control...
  • Page 448 3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Value Range 10 ´ n (n=1–255) s Maintenance Console Location 3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.9 External Sensor SVM Feature Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature. It is possible to use the ESVM card for the SVM feature, as an MSG card (OGM feature), or both.
  • Page 449 3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Feature Guide References 1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) 1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 450: 1-1] Slot-Opb3 Card Property-Card Command

    3.59 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command 3.59 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command Commands for the service cards installed on the OPB card can be programmed. Puts the card in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 3.59 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 451 EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card ESVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 3.59 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property—Card Command Installation Manual References For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: 1.2.1 Optional Equipment For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1.2.1 Optional Equipment For KX-TDE600: 1.2.1 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 452: 1-1] Slot-Opb3 Option Card Setup

    EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card ESVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 3.60 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup Installation Manual References For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: 1.2.1 Optional Equipment For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1.2.1 Optional Equipment For KX-TDE600: 1.2.1 Optional Equipment Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot...
  • Page 453 3.60 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot 3.58 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property Feature Guide References None Card Inserted Displays the type of option card currently installed to each slot of the OPB3 card Value Range MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card DPH2: 2-Port Doorphone Card...

  • Page 454: 1-2] Portable Station

    3.61 [1-2] Portable Station 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-NCP500/ KX-NCP1000), 128 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), or 512 (with the KX-TDE600) PSs can be registered. Information on 32 PSs is displayed at a time. To display other PSs, click the applicable tab.
  • Page 455 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection Index Indicates the PS number (reference only). Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: 1–64 For KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–128 For KX-TDE600: 1–512 Maintenance Console Location 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station...
  • Page 456 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station number specified here will not be altered by the extension number of the main telephone even if the PS is in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 457 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station Feature Guide References 1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 458: 1-3] Option

    3.62 [1-3] Option 3.62 [1-3] Option System options can be programmed. It is possible to clear the master CS information (Master CS Port and Radio System ID) by following the procedure below in batch mode: Click Clear Master CS. Click Yes. To abort the procedure, click No. If the system data is downloaded to the PBX after the master CS information has been cleared, it is necessary to register all PSs again in the interactive mode.
  • Page 459 3.62 [1-3] Option New Card Installation—Automatic Extension Number Set for Extension Card Selects whether extension numbers are assigned to extension ports automatically or manually. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 3.62 [1-3] Option Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card Specifies whether a PRI23 card is automatically set to ISDN Standard mode or T1-LCOT mode when it is...

  • Page 460: 1-4] Clock Priority

    3.63 [1-4] Clock Priority 3.63 [1-4] Clock Priority Slot Number (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), Shelf-Slot Number (for KX-TDE600) Selects and prioritises slot numbers for the BRI, PRI, T1, and E1 cards that are used to forward a clock pulse from an external source to the PBX.

  • Page 461: [2] System

    Section 4 [2] System PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 462: 2-1-1] Date & Time-Date & Time Setting

    4.1 [2-1-1] Date & Time—Date & Time Setting 4.1 [2-1-1] Date & Time—Date & Time Setting The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of extensions (e.g., PT, PS). This option is only available in Interactive mode.

  • Page 463: 2-1-2] Date & Time-Sntp / Daylight Saving

    4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving 4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Automatic clock adjustment and Summer time (daylight saving time) settings of the PBX can be programmed. Automatic clock adjustment can be performed using one of two methods, ISDN & Caller ID or SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol).
  • Page 464 4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Maintenance Console Location 4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.3.5 Automatic Setup SNTP—Time Zone—Time Zone Specifies your local UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) time zone using the up and down arrows. Value Range -14:00–+14:00 Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 465: 2-1-2] Date & Time-Sntp / Daylight Saving-Daylight Saving

    4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving 4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving— Daylight Saving Summer time can be programmed. Summer time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start date, and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date. The start and end dates of a maximum of 20 different summer times can be programmed.
  • Page 466 4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving End Date—Year, Month, Day Specifies the end date of daylight savings time. Value Range Year: 2000–2099 Month: 1–12 Day: 1–31 Maintenance Console Location 4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving Programming Manual References 4.2 [2-1-2] Date &...

  • Page 467: 2-2] Operator & Bgm

    4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM Settings related to the PBX operator and audio sources can be specified. PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the extension number or floating extension number of incoming call distribution group to be designated as the PBX operator in each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
  • Page 468 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM2–7 (for KX-NCP series)/Music Source of BGM3–8 (for KX-TDE series)—OGM No. Selects the OGM number and name of the audio source of BGM. Note To use this feature it is necessary to disable the SVM Feature setting for the corresponding card. Value Range None, OGM1–OGM64 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 469 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold Selects the audio source for Music on Hold. Value Range For KX-NCP series: Tone, BGM, BGM2, BGM3, BGM4, BGM5, BGM6, BGM7 For KX-TDE series: Tone, BGM, BGM2, BGM3, BGM4, BGM5, BGM6, BGM7, BGM8 Maintenance Console Location 4.4 [2-2] Operator &...

  • Page 470: 2-3] Timers & Counters

    4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Various system timers and counters can be programmed. Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times Automatic Redial is attempted before being cancelled. Value Range 0–15 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 471 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial Automatic Redial—Analogue CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer Specifies the length of time before the PBX stops muting the caller’s voice and cancels busy tone detection when Automatic Redial to analogue trunk is performed.
  • Page 472 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Dial—Extension First Digit Specifies the length of time after going off-hook within which the first digit of a feature number or destination must be dialled before a reorder tone is heard. Value Range 1–250 s Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers &...
  • Page 473 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Dial—Analogue CO Inter-digit Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a telephone number must be sent to an analogue trunk. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognises end of dialling and stops muting the caller’s voice over the analogue trunk.

  • Page 474: Recall—Transfer Recall

    4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the length of time until an unanswered trunk call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode. Note that this setting is only valid for extensions whose Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night is set to "0".
  • Page 475 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.12.1 Call Transfer Recall—Call Park Recall Specifies the length of time that a parked call waits to be retrieved, before the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension that parked the call hears a Call Park Recall ring.

  • Page 476: Tone Length—Busy Tone / Dnd Tone

    4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 1.13.1 Call Hold Tone Length—Busy Tone / DND Tone Specifies the length of time that a busy/DND tone is heard when a call is made to an extension in busy status or DND mode. A reorder tone will be sent when this timer expires. (For a call through DISA, the call will be disconnected when this timer expires.) Value Range 0 (continuous)–15 s...
  • Page 477 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release 1.11.1 Hands-free Operation DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf DISA—Delayed Answer Timer Specifies the length of time that the caller hears a ringback tone before hearing an OGM. Value Range 0–30 s Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 478 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer Specifies the length of time after the OGM finishes playing in which the caller must begin dialling before the call is redirected to the operator. Value Range 0–120 s Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers &...
  • Page 479 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing...
  • Page 480 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time Specifies the length of time that a trunk-to-trunk call on a DISA line is prolonged each time that the caller prolongs the call. (Selecting "0" prevents the caller from prolonging the trunk-to-trunk call.) Value Range 60 ´...

  • Page 481: Doorphone—Call Ring Duration

    4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Doorphone—Call Ring Duration Specifies the length of time that a call from a doorphone rings until the call is cancelled when there is no answer. Value Range 10 ´...
  • Page 482 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Feature Guide References 1.17.2 Door Open Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times that an alarm is repeated. Value Range 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers &...
  • Page 483 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration Specifies the length of time that an alarm rings. Value Range 10 ´ n (n=1–30) s Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.28.4 Timed Reminder Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer Specifies the length of time until the conference originator receives an Unattended Conference Recall tone.
  • Page 484 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.14.1.2 Conference Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer Specifies the length of time until an Unattended Conference is disconnected after the parties involved in the conference receive a warning tone but the conference originator does not return to the conference. Value Range 0–240 s Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 485 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display Specifies the length of time that a Caller ID number, with the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line from the telephone company, is shown on the display. The Caller ID number flashes on the display for five seconds, followed by a 10-second pause, then flashes again for five seconds.
  • Page 486 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.9 External Sensor Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DDI / DID Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a DDI/DID number from a public network. The call will be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires.

  • Page 487: Pt Display—Pt Last Display Duration In Idle Mode

    4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode Specifies the length of time that the current information remains on the display after the extension returns to idle status. Value Range 1–15 s Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers &...
  • Page 488 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24 Voice Mail Features During Conversation—DTMF Signal Length Specifies the length of time that a DTMF signal is sent when a number is dialled from a PT or PS during a conversation.

  • Page 489: System Wireless—Ps Out Of Range Timer

    4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Value Range 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s Maintenance Console Location 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer When the destination of an incoming call is a PS, specifies the length of time the PBX searches for the PS before setting its status to Out of Range.

  • Page 490: Svm—Dial Tone Continuous Time

    4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) SVM—Dial Tone Continuous Time Specifies the length of time that dial tone 3 is heard after all messages stored by the SVM feature for an extension are finished playing. Value Range 1–60 s Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 491: 2-4] Week Table

    4.6 [2-4] Week Table 4.6 [2-4] Week Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of day. The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode from the Time Service Switching Mode option.

  • Page 492: 2-4] Week Table-Time Setting

    4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting 4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting The start times of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Time Table, as well as the start and end times of up to 3 break periods. 1.
  • Page 493 4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.3 Tenant Service 2.2.4 Time Service 2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Hour, Minute Specifies the start time for each break period. Times can only be set when 2.
  • Page 494 4.7 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.3 Tenant Service 2.2.4 Time Service PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 495: 2-5] Holiday Table

    4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table 4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list. The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed. Holiday Table—Setting Enables the setting of the holiday.
  • Page 496 4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.4 Time Service Holiday Table—End Date—Month Specifies the month of the holiday end date. Value Range 1–12 Maintenance Console Location 4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 497: 2-6-1] Numbering Plan-Main

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers, numbers to access other PBXs in a network, and KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling numbers can be programmed here. For more information on flexible numbering, see "2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature Guide.

  • Page 498: Operator Call

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Features Feature numbers to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a dial tone. Operator Call Specifies the feature number used to call the operator. Value Range Max.
  • Page 499 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Trunk Group Access Specifies the feature number used to make a trunk call using an idle trunk from a certain trunk group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings...

  • Page 500: Doorphone Call

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial System Speed Dialling / Personal Speed Dialling Specifies the feature number used to make a call using a System/Personal Speed Dialling number. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...

  • Page 501: External Bgm On / Off

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call Group Paging Specifies the feature number used to page a certain paging group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...
  • Page 502 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main OGM Record / Clear / Playback Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to record, clear, or play back a certain OGM. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message...

  • Page 503: Group Call Pickup

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.9 Parallelled Telephone Group Call Pickup Specifies the feature number used to answer a call ringing at a certain call pickup group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...
  • Page 504 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 7.2 [5-2] External Pager Feature Guide References 1.17.3 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) Group Paging Answer Specifies the feature number used to answer a page to a paging group.

  • Page 505: Account Code Entry

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 1.8.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code Specifies the feature number used to change the COS of an extension temporarily, and also change the feature settings (for example, FWD, DND) of an extension from another extension or through DISA. Value Range Max.
  • Page 506 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve Specifies the feature number used to hold a call or retrieve a call on hold from the holding extension. Value Range Max.

  • Page 507: Door Open

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Call Park / Call Park Retrieve Specifies the feature number used to hold a call in a parking zone or retrieve a call held in a parking zone. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...

  • Page 508: External Feature Access

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Feature Guide References 1.17.2 Door Open External Relay Access Specifies the feature number used to activate a relay. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 7.6 [5-4] External Relay...
  • Page 509 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN COLR Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel COLR, which suppresses the presentation of the called party’s number to the caller.
  • Page 510 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)

  • Page 511: Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 1.21.1.9 Malicious Call Identification (MCID) ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set / Cancel / Confirm Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the FWD of incoming ISDN calls to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company (instead of the PBX), or confirm the FWD setting. Extension users can set the FWD destination to the network on an MSN basis.
  • Page 512 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming trunk calls. Value Range Max.
  • Page 513 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main FWD No Answer Timer Set Specifies the feature number used to set the length of time before a call is forwarded. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND...
  • Page 514 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming intercom calls to an incoming call distribution group.

  • Page 515: Walking Extension

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Paging Deny Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Paging Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions from paging your extension). Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 5.10 [3-4] Paging Group...

  • Page 516: Manual Call Waiting For Extension Call

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.5 Data Line Security Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call Specifies the feature number used to set or change the method of receiving a Call Waiting notification from an extension.
  • Page 517 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Executive Busy Override 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Executive Busy Override Deny Feature Guide References 1.8.2 Executive Busy Override...

  • Page 518: Incoming Call Queue Monitor

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out Incoming Call Queue Monitor Specifies the feature number, available only for extensions assigned as a supervisor, used to monitor the status of an incoming call distribution group with the extension display. Value Range Max.

  • Page 519: Bgm Set / Cancel

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.19.2 Absent Message BGM Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the BGM heard through the telephone speaker while on-hook.

  • Page 520: Printing Message

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Timed Reminder Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.28.4 Timed Reminder...
  • Page 521 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock Time Service (Day / Lunch / Break / Night) Switch Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to change the time mode manually. Value Range Max.

  • Page 522: Extension Feature Clear

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Manager— Manager Feature Guide References 1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock Extension Feature Clear Specifies the feature number used to reset certain features of an extension to the default values.
  • Page 523 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) Dial Information (CTI) Specifies the feature number used to send dial information to the CTI feature instead of the PBX. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...

  • Page 524: Simplified Voice Message Access

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Maintenance Console Location 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Feature Guide References 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Busy Out Cancel Specifies the feature number used to cancel the Busy Out status of an analogue trunk. Value Range Max.

  • Page 525: Other Pbx Extension

    4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Other PBX Extension Other PBX extension numbers can be used to easily call extensions connected to PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network. The leading numbers of all PBXs in the network that will be called should be entered in this table.
  • Page 526 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Feature Guide References 1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling Message Key—Phone Number Specifies the feature number or telephone number dialled when the MESSAGE button on the KX-T7710 is pressed. By default, this is set to the feature number used to call back a caller who left a message waiting indication, Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back.

  • Page 527: 2-6-2] Numbering Plan-Quick Dial

    4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial 4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Quick Dialling numbers are used to call extensions or outside parties, or access certain features without having to dial their full numbers. It is possible to register Quick Dialling numbers that overlap with other registered numbers (refer to "Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks"...

  • Page 528: Phone Number

    4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Feature Guide References 1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling 1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network 2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering Phone Number Specifies the number to be dialled when the corresponding Quick Dialling number is used. Value Range Max.

  • Page 529: 2-6-3] Numbering Plan-B/Na Dnd Call Feature

    4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature 4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number. For more information on flexible numbering, see "2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering"...

  • Page 530: Message Waiting Set

    4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice Specifies the feature number used to allow a caller to change the called extension’s preset call receiving method to ring tone or voice. Value Range 1 digit (0–9, *, or #) Maintenance Console Location 4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Programming Manual References...
  • Page 531 4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Executive— Call Monitor 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny Feature Guide References 1.8.3 Call Monitor Automatic Callback Busy Specifies the feature number used to reserve a busy line and receive callback ringing when the line becomes idle.
  • Page 532 4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature 1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone 1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) 1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 533: 2-7-1] Class Of Service-Cos Settings

    4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A maximum of 64 COS levels can be programmed.
  • Page 534 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) TRS Level on Extension Lock Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making trunk calls when an extension is locked using the Extension Dial Lock feature. Value Range 1: Allows all trunk calls 2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables 7: Restricts all trunk calls...

  • Page 535: Co & Smdr

    4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) CO & SMDR COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
  • Page 536 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 1.12.1 Call Transfer Call Forward to CO Enables the forwarding of calls to trunks. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 537 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry CF (MSN) Enables forwarding of ISDN calls to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company, instead of the PBX, on an MSN basis. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 538: Dnd Override

    4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Call Pickup by DSS Enables using a DSS button to pick up a call to a specified extension. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 539: Transfer To Busy Extension W/O Bss Operation

    4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) OHCA / Whisper OHCA Enables using OHCA/Whisper OHCA as a method of second call notification by entering the feature number. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 540: Call Monitor

    4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 1.12.1 Call Transfer Automatic Answer (Caller) Enables a caller to have calls automatically answered when the destination has set Hands-free Answerback. Value Range Disable: Even if the destination has set Hands-free Answerback, the call will not be automatically answered. Enable: The call will be automatically answered.

  • Page 541: Executive Busy Override Deny

    4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 1.8.3 Call Monitor Executive Busy Override Enables interrupting an existing call to establish a three-party conference call. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 542: Programming Mode Level

    4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Manager COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Group Forward Set Enables setting call forwarding for calls to an incoming call distribution group.
  • Page 543 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Feature Guide References 2.3.2 PT Programming Manager Specifies the authorisation to use manager features. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 544 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings PDN/SDN An SDN button allows a PT user to see the current status of the corresponding PDN extension, and to pick up or transfer calls to that extension easily. The settings here control how SDN buttons operate for extensions at each COS level.
  • Page 545 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN— COS Name Feature Guide References 1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension SDN Key Assignment by PT Program Selects whether PT users can create SDN buttons on their own extensions using PT programming.

  • Page 546: Door Unlock

    4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Door Unlock Enables using the door opener feature. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—...
  • Page 547 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Remote Operation by Other Extension Allows the Walking COS feature to be used from a remote location (inside the PBX, or outside the PBX using DISA).
  • Page 548 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) CA Chat Enables the chat feature when using Communication Assistant (CA) Client.
  • Page 549 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CA— CA Chat Feature Guide References 1.32.3 CA (Communication Assistant) Miscellaneous COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 550 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 551: 2-7-2] Class Of Service-External Call Block

    Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making trunk calls, depending on the time mode (day/ lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list. Outgoing Trunk Group 1–64 (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200) or 1–96 (for KX-TDE600) Specifies the available trunk groups.

  • Page 552: 2-7-3] Class Of Service-Internal Call Block

    4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block 4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions, incoming call distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed to not receive intercom calls from those belonging to a certain COS.

  • Page 553: 2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Co

    4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO 4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming trunk calls depending on the trunk group that the calls are received on. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.

  • Page 554: 2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Doorphone

    4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone 4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the doorphone port that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.

  • Page 555: 2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Others

    4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others 4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by certain PBX features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
  • Page 556 4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Value Range Single, Double, Triple, S-Double, Option 1, Option 2 Maintenance Console Location 4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table Feature Guide References None...
  • Page 557 4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 558: 2-9] System Options

    4.18 [2-9] System Options 4.18 [2-9] System Options Various system settings can be programmed. Option 1 PT LCD—Date Display Selects the order that the month and date are shown on the displays of extensions. Value Range Date-Month, Month-Date Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 559 4.18 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the FWD feature is activated. Value Range On (Solid): Red on Flash: Slow red flashing...
  • Page 560 4.18 [2-9] System Options Feature Guide References 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 1.20.3 LED Indication PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle Selects the function of the FWD/DND button (fixed button) when it is pressed in idle status. (A FWD/DND button customised on a flexible button is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch mode, and the mode cannot be changed.) Value Range FWD/DND Setting Mode: Enter programming mode for the FWD/DND setting.
  • Page 561 4.18 [2-9] System Options PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor for KX-T74xx/T75xx/T76xx Enables the use of Off-Hook Monitor with KX-T7400, KX-T7500, KX-T7600, or KX-DT300 series telephones and IP-PTs. Value Range Disable: The PT user’s voice is sent through the handsfree microphone. The other party’s voice is heard through the hands-free speaker.
  • Page 562 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting Specifies whether incoming call ringing can be turned off at individual extensions. If disabled, users cannot prevent incoming calls from ringing. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options...
  • Page 563 4.18 [2-9] System Options Value Range Disable (Disconnect), Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 1.13.1 Call Hold PT Operation—Hold Key Mode Selects which extensions can retrieve a held call or a call that is transferred by Call Transfer without Announcement feature.
  • Page 564 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.28.2 Extension Feature Clear Extension Clear—Fwd/DND Specifies whether the FWD/DND setting is cleared when Extension Feature Clear is performed. Value Range Clear, Do not clear Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 565 4.18 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CODEC—Network CODEC Selects the codec type for ISDN or T1/E1 lines. Value Range A-Law, µ-Law Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 566 4.18 [2-9] System Options Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN) Selects whether Automatic Redial to an ISDN line is performed when the called party does not answer within a preprogrammed time period. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References 4.5 [2-3] Timers &...
  • Page 567 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial Redial—Call Log by Redial key Enables display of the Outgoing Call Log on a DPT by pressing the REDIAL button while on hook. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options...

  • Page 568: Co - Co Call Limitation—After Conference

    4.18 [2-9] System Options CO - CO Call Limitation—After Conference Selects whether to allow a call between 2 outside destinations to continue after the originator of the conference has left the conference. Value Range Enable: The call will be disconnected. Disable: The call will continue.
  • Page 569 4.18 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback 1.16.1 Paging 1.29.2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after Making Call / Call from Doorphone Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-1. Confirmation Tone 3-1 is heard from an extension when, for example, it pages another extension, or from a doorphone when the doorphone button is pressed.
  • Page 570 4.18 [2-9] System Options Feature Guide References 1.29.2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 4-1. Confirmation Tone 4-1 is heard from an extension when a new party joins a conference call. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 571: Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone

    4.18 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.29.2 Confirmation Tone Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone Enables the PBX to send dial tones at different frequencies depending on the setting of the extension. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 572 4.18 [2-9] System Options Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS Selects the dial tone the PBX (instead of the network) sends to the caller when a call is made using the ARS feature, or ISDN En Bloc dialling. Value Range Type A, Type B Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References...
  • Page 573 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Echo Cancel—Extension to Analogue Line Enables the use of the ECHO/EECHO card for extension-to-analogue trunk calls. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None...

  • Page 574: Dss Key—Call Pick-Up By Dss Key For Icd Group Call

    4.18 [2-9] System Options Value Range ON or Flash, OFF Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup 1.20.3 LED Indication DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified extension.

  • Page 575: Dss Key—Automatic Transfer For Extension Call

    4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for Extension Call Specifies whether pressing a DSS or SDN button during an extension-to-extension call disconnects the current call or places the call on consultation hold. Value Range Disable: The PBX disconnects the current call, and calls the extension assigned to the DSS or SDN button.
  • Page 576 4.18 [2-9] System Options Private Network—Public Call through Private Network—Minimum Public Caller ID Digits Specifies the minimum length of Caller ID required for a call from a private network to be considered as a call from a public network. Value Range 0–15 Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options...
  • Page 577 4.18 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO Selects whether the CLIP number of the calling party or the CLIP number of the forwarding extension or virtual PS is sent to the forwarding destination to identify the origin of a trunk call.

  • Page 578: System Wireless—Out Of Range Registration

    4.18 [2-9] System Options Feature Guide References 1.2.2.3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) 1.30.6 Network ICD Group System Wireless—Out of Range Registration Selects whether the PBX can set the status of a PS to Out of Range if no signal is received from the PS for a preset length of time.

  • Page 579: Slt—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    4.18 [2-9] System Options Value Range Mode 1, Mode 2, Mode 3, Mode 4 Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.13.1 Call Hold SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern (KX-TDE series only) Specifies the Message Waiting Lamp light pattern of SLTs. Value Range 1–12 Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 580: Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting For Extension Call

    4.18 [2-9] System Options Feature Guide References 1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting for Extension Call Selects whether Busy Station Signalling (BSS) is automatically performed when an extension user calls a busy extension. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 581 4.18 [2-9] System Options Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PT Feature Access—No. 1–8 Specifies the System Feature Access Menu (1–8) shown on the display of an extension. Value Range None, Call Back Cancel, Call Pickup Direct, Call Pickup Group, Doorphone Call, Door Open, Relay On, External BGM, Paging Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options...

  • Page 582: Isdn Option—Calling Party Name Sending Format

    4.18 [2-9] System Options ISDN Option—Calling Party Name Presentation to PRI23 Specifies whether the name of the calling party is displayed when making a call to the ISDN network. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 583 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry counter Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for First Party Call Control CTI such as Communication Assistant (CA).
  • Page 584 4.18 [2-9] System Options 3rd Party CTI—System status retry counter Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number of times without success, the PBX assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost.
  • Page 585 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) CTI Multi PBX Control—PBX Name Specifies the name of the PBX, for network programming reference. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 586: Cti Hold—Forced Idle When Hold By Pdn/Sdn Key

    4.18 [2-9] System Options Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 4.18 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CTI Hold—Forced Idle when Hold by PDN/SDN Key Selects whether to force an extension (e.g., KX-NT400) to become idle while having a call held on a PDN/SDN button.

  • Page 587: 2-10] Extension Cid Settings

    4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings 4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed. Extension Caller ID Modulation Type Specifies the modulation frequency to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT. Value Range V.23(ETSI), Bell202(Bellcore) Maintenance Console Location 4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings...
  • Page 588 4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Maintenance Console Location 4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Channel Seizure Wait Time Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before starting to send the seizure signal following the first ring when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.
  • Page 589 4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Additional Local Trunk Access Code to Extension Caller ID Enables the PBX to automatically add a Trunk Access number to the received telephone number when sending the Caller ID number of an incoming trunk call to an SLT. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 590 4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Send Caller ID Long Distance to Extension Enables the PBX to send a call qualifier (Long Distance) (if received from the trunk) when sending Caller ID information to an SLT.

  • Page 591: 2-11-1] Audio Gain-Paging/Moh

    4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH 4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Gain levels for the External Pager/External BGM ports can be programmed. Paging—EPG (External Pager) (for KX-NCP series)/EPG 1 (External Pager 1) (for KX-TDE series) Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 1. KX-NCP series PBXs have only one External Pager port.

  • Page 592: Moh—Moh 2 (Music On Hold 2) (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Maintenance Console Location 4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Programming Manual References 5.10 [3-4] Paging Group Feature Guide References 1.16.1 Paging MOH—MOH (Music On Hold) (for KX-NCP series)/MOH 1 (Music On Hold 1) (for KX-TDE series) Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 1. KX-NCP series PBXs have only one External BGM port. Value Range -11–11 dB Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 593: 2-11-2] Audio Gain-Card

    4.21 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card 4.21 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card. Up Gain (To PBX) Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected type of card to the PBX. Value Range -15–15 dB Maintenance Console Location 4.21 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card Programming Manual References...
  • Page 594 4.21 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 595: [3] Group

    Section 5 [3] Group PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 596: 3-1-1] Trunk Group-Trg Settings

    5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Trunks can be organised into trunk groups. The settings of each trunk group determine the settings of the trunks within that group. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 96 (with the KX-TDE600) trunk groups can be programmed.
  • Page 597 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Line Hunting Order Specifies the trunk hunting sequence for the trunk group. The hunting sequence can be programmed to start from the lowest or highest numbered trunks, or to rotate uniformly among all trunks. Value Range High ->...
  • Page 598 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings 4.18 [2-9] System Options 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation Caller ID Modification Table Specifies the table to be used for modifying caller information (telephone number). Value Range 1–4 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 599 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Tone Detection Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Guide References None DISA Tone Detection—Silence...

  • Page 600: Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Silence

    5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 601: Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Cyclic

    5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Cyclic Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by cyclic signal detection. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 602 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Feature Guide References None Host PBX Access Code 1–10 Specifies the feature number used to access a trunk from the host PBX. Value Range Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings...
  • Page 603 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Maintenance Console Location 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Wait Time Selects the length of time that the PBX waits before sending a flash signal to reject a collect call. This setting is only for users in Brazil.

  • Page 604: 3-1-2] Trunk Group-Local Access Priority

    Trunk Group No. & Name Specifies the trunk group assigned to the corresponding priority level. Select the blank option to not assign a trunk group to the priority. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Trunk Group No. 1–64 For KX-TDE600: Trunk Group No. 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority...

  • Page 605: 3-1-3] Caller Id Modification

    5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically according to preprogrammed modification tables, and then recorded for calling back. Leading Digits After the caller’s number is modified by the Length of Digits Modification Tables or CLIP Modification Tables, the PBX checks the leading digits of the modified number for an area code programmed in the Caller ID Modification Table assigned to that trunk group.
  • Page 606 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the incoming caller’s number in the place of the removed digits. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References...
  • Page 607 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Minimum Caller ID Digits (for National) Specifies the minimum number of digits required in the caller’s number for it to be recognised as a national call. The value specified here must be smaller than Minimum Caller ID Digits (for International).
  • Page 608 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Value Range Max. 8 digits (0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Calling Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Called Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID...
  • Page 609 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Calling Party Number—Type of Number—Public, Private 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—...

  • Page 610: 3-1-4] Dialling Plan

    5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan 5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after an extension user completes dialling. The PBX can recognise the end of dialling when the dialled telephone number starts with the programmed leading number and contains the programmed total number of digits.
  • Page 611 5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the number dialled by en-bloc dialling in the place of the removed digits. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 5.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan Programming Manual References None...

  • Page 612: 3-1-4] Dialling Plan-Auto Assign

    5.5 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign 5.5 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically. Select Auto Assigning Table Selects the set of preset leading number values to assign to the active dialling plan table. When Type D is selected, you will be prompted to enter a 3-digit area code, and 7 "X"s, in cells 1 through 47 of the dialling plan table.

  • Page 613: 3-1-5] Trunk Group-Charge Rate

    5.6 [3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate 5.6 [3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate The rate charged per pay tone signal (sent from the telephone company) can be assigned for each trunk group. Trunk Group Name Indicates the name of the trunk group (reference only). Value Range Max.

  • Page 614: 3-2] User Group

    Extensions can be assigned to a tenant according to their extension user groups. An extension user group can belong to only one tenant. However, one extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups and several paging groups. A maximum of 8 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 32 (with the KX-TDE600) tenants can be programmed.
  • Page 615 5.7 [3-2] User Group 2.2.3 Tenant Service PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 616: 3-3] Call Pickup Group

    Extensions can be assigned to a call pickup group according to their extension user groups. One extension user group can belong to up to 8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/ KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 96 (with the KX-TDE600) call pickup groups can be programmed.
  • Page 617 5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group Feature Guide References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup 2.2.2 Group PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 618: 3-3] Call Pickup Group-All Setting

    6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup 2.2.2 Group User Group 1–32 (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 1–96 (for KX-TDE600) Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding pickup group. Value Range ON (blue), OFF Maintenance Console Location 5.9 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting...

  • Page 619: 3-4] Paging Group

    Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers can also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. A maximum of 32 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 96 (with the KX-TDE600) paging groups can be programmed.
  • Page 620 5.10 [3-4] Paging Group Feature Guide References 1.16.1 Paging 2.2.2 Group PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 621: 3-4] Paging Group-All Setting

    6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.16.1 Paging 2.2.2 Group User Group 1–32 (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 1–96 (for KX-TDE600) Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding paging group. Value Range ON (blue), OFF (white) Maintenance Console Location 5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting...

  • Page 622: 3-4] Paging Group-External

    5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager 5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager External pagers can be assigned to a paging group. One external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. Paging Group Name Indicates the name of the paging group (reference only). Value Range Max.
  • Page 623 5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager Maintenance Console Location 5.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.16.1 Paging 2.2.2 Group PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 624: 3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group-Group Settings

    5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group— Group Settings Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed. A maximum of 128 incoming call distribution groups can be programmed.
  • Page 625 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Distribution Method Selects the method for distributing calls to idle extensions of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Ring, UCD, Priority Hunting Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 626 Specifies the tenant to which the incoming call distribution group belongs, to determine the Time Table and the audio source for the group. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.) Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings...

  • Page 627: Overflow Queuing Busy

    5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Specifies the COS of the incoming call distribution group. Depending on the COS, calls from certain extensions are restricted as determined by the Internal Call Block feature. Also, when calls are forwarded or overflowed to a trunk, the TRS/Barring assigned for the COS of the incoming call distribution group applies.
  • Page 628 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References...

  • Page 629: Overflow No Answer

    5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Queuing Busy—Queue Call Capacity Specifies the number of calls that can wait in a queue. Value Range None, 1–30 Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature Overflow No Answer...
  • Page 630 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the overflow destination of queued calls when they are not answered or are redirected by Manual Queue Redirection in each time mode.
  • Page 631 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Hurry-up Level Specifies the number of calls to hold in the queue before prompting Manual Queue Redirection by flashing the Hurry-up button. Value Range None, 1–30 Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button...
  • Page 632 Feature Guide References None Queuing Time Table—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the Queuing Time Table to be used in each time mode. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: None, Table 1–Table 64 For KX-TDE600: None, Table 1–Table 128 Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References 4.6 [2-4] Week Table...
  • Page 633 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Miscellaneous Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 634 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution 1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out Specifies the number of consecutive unanswered calls before a member extension is automatically logged out from the incoming call distribution group.
  • Page 635 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Last Extension Log-out Specifies whether the last extension logged-in to the incoming call distribution group is allowed to log out. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 636 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature Programmed Mailbox No. Specifies the mailbox number of the incoming call distribution group’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration. Value Range Max.
  • Page 637 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of unanswered calls to the incoming call distribution group that can be logged in the call log memory.
  • Page 638 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Group FWD Call from CO—Destination Specifies the forward destination of incoming trunk calls directed to the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 639 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 640: 3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group-Group Settings-Member List

    5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List 5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group— Group Settings—Member List Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 128 members (extensions) assigned to it, and each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member of multiple incoming call distribution groups.
  • Page 641 5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List Delayed Ring Specifies the delayed ringing setting of each member. (Applicable when the call distribution method of the incoming call distribution group is set to Ring.) Value Range Immediate, 1–6 Rings, No Ring Maintenance Console Location 5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List Programming Manual References...

  • Page 642: 3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group-Queuing Time Table

    Queuing Time Table A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are handled. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 128 (with the KX-TDE600) Queuing Time Tables can be programmed.

  • Page 643: 3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group-Miscellaneous

    5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous 5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group— Miscellaneous Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed. Options—Call Log to ICD Group for Answered Call Selects whether answered calls to an ICD Group are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group, in addition to the log of the extension that answered the call.
  • Page 644 5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Value Range Disable (UCD), Enable (ACD) Maintenance Console Location 5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution Options—Wrap-up Timer based on Selects whether the ICD Group member wrap-up timer or extension wrap-up timer is used. If Extension is selected here, Wrap-up Timer on 5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List becomes unavailable.

  • Page 645: 3-6] Extension Hunting Group

    (day/lunch/break/night). A maximum of 64 (with the KX-NCP500/ KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 128 (with the KX-TDE600) hunting groups can be programmed, each containing up to 16 extensions.
  • Page 646 5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group Overflow—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the overflow destination of an unanswered call in each time mode. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group Programming Manual References...

  • Page 647: 3-6] Extension Hunting Group-Member List

    5.18 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List 5.18 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to programme from the Hunting Group No. list. To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click Extension No.

  • Page 648: 3-7-1] Vm(Dpt) Group-System Settings

    5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings 5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DPT Integration can be connected to DPT ports of the PBX. The DPT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DPT) Group.
  • Page 649 5.19 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Transfer Recall to Mailbox Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the VPS in these situations: (1) when a call is transferred to an extension by the Call Transfer without Announcement feature using the Automated Attendant (AA) service of the VPS, and the call is not answered within a programmed time period;...

  • Page 650: 3-7-2] Vm(Dpt) Group-Unit Settings

    5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings A VM (DPT) group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.
  • Page 651 5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings Centralised VM Unit Setting Floating Extension No. (TIE) Specifies the floating extension number of the centralised VM (DPT) group. This floating extension number must start with the number used to access a TIE line or the extensions of another PBX. Value Range Max.

  • Page 652: 3-7-2] Vm(Dpt) Group-Unit Settings-Member List

    5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List 5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Displays information on the settings of all relevant ports. Only ports set to VM(DPT) in DPT Type—Type of 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port will be displayed. In addition, the other information displayed here can also be set in 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port.
  • Page 653 5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1, 2 For KX-TDE600: 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type—Type 5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings Feature Guide References 1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group VM Port No.
  • Page 654 5.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type—Type 5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension (reference only). Value Range Max.

  • Page 655: 3-8-1] Vm(Dtmf) Group-System Settings

    5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DTMF Integration can be connected to SLT ports of the PBX. The SLT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DTMF) Group. A maximum of 2 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 8 (with the KX-TDE600) VM (DTMF) Groups can be programmed.
  • Page 656 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause]) Maintenance Console Location 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Status Signal—DND Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is in DND mode. Value Range Max.
  • Page 657 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Status Signal—Confirm Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when a certain feature (e.g., Message Waiting) has been successfully set or cancelled on an extension. Value Range Max.
  • Page 658 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Maintenance Console Location 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Busy Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the VPS and all ports of the VPS are busy.

  • Page 659: Vm Dtmf Command—Listening Message

    5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings VM DTMF Command—Recording Message Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS when a call is forwarded, intercepted, or transferred to the VPS, so that the caller can leave a message in a certain mailbox. Value Range Max.
  • Page 660 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Command—Switching to VM Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS to switch from AA Service Mode to VM Service Mode. Value Range Max.
  • Page 661 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Maintenance Console Location 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Timing—Waiting Time before Sending Follow on ID Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the Follow on ID to the VPS after the VPS has answered a call.
  • Page 662 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Others—Call Waiting on VM Group Enables the queuing of calls when all extension ports of the VM (DTMF) group are busy. (Call Waiting tone is not sent to any VM port.) Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 663 5.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Others—Mailbox for Extension Specifies whether the mailboxes use the same numbers as the extensions and incoming call distribution groups, or use different numbers as programmed for each extension or incoming call distribution group. Value Range Extension Number, Programmed Mailbox Number Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 664: 3-8-2] Vm(Dtmf) Group-Group Settings

    5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings 5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings A VM (DTMF) group has a floating extension number, and can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.
  • Page 665 5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings Maintenance Console Location 5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 666: 3-8-2] Vm(Dtmf) Group-Group Settings-Member List

    5.24 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List 5.24 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings— Member List Select the group to programme from the VM(DTMF) Group Number list. To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension No. Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

  • Page 667: 3-9] Ps Ring Group

    One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be programmed, each containing up to 64 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000), 128 (with the KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200), or 512 (with the KX-TDE600) PS extensions.
  • Page 668 5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group Value Range Caller ID, Called Number Maintenance Console Location 5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.25.2 PS Ring Group PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 669: 3-9] Ps Ring Group-Member List

    5.26 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List 5.26 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List Each PS Ring Group can have up to 64 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000), 128 (with the KX-TDE100/ KX-TDE200), or 512 (with the KX-TDE600) PS extensions assigned. Select the group to programme from the PS Ring Group Number list.

  • Page 670: 3-10] Conference Group

    5.27 [3-10] Conference Group 5.27 [3-10] Conference Group A conference group is a group of telephones (extensions or outside destinations) that ring when a conference group call is made. One destination number can be assigned to multiple conference groups. Up to 31 members can be assigned to each of 8 conference groups.
  • Page 671 5.27 [3-10] Conference Group PS Operation to Talk Enables PS users to use the push-to-talk feature during a conference group call, when Broadcast Mode is set to "Enable". The push-to-talk feature allows PS users to speak during the call by pressing any of their dial keys.

  • Page 672: 3-10] Conference Group-Member List

    5.28 [3-10] Conference Group—Member List 5.28 [3-10] Conference Group—Member List Up to 31 members can be assigned to each conference group. Select the group to programme from the Conference Group No. list. When Broadcast Mode is set to "Disable", only up to 7 members can be assigned to a group. All of these members are automatically allowed to speak when the call starts.

  • Page 673: [4] Extension

    Section 6 [4] Extension PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 674: 4-1-1] Wired Extension-Extension Settings

    6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings For each slot in which an extension card is installed, a certain number of extension ports are displayed. For each extension port, various extension settings can be assigned. To search for a specific extension, enter the extension number or the extension name in the search box and click Find Next.
  • Page 675 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 676 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Guide References None Port Type Indicates the extension port type (reference only). Value Range DPT: DPT port (DLC) SLT: SLT port (SLC/MSLC/CSLC) S-Hybrid: Super Hybrid port (DHLC) S-Hybrid(SLT): XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC) S-Hybrid(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC) DPT(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of DPT port (DLC)
  • Page 677 None User Group Specifies the extension user group to which the extension belongs. Extension user groups are used to compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–32 For KX-TDE600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings...
  • Page 678 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Extension PIN Specifies the PIN of the extension. CAUTION There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
  • Page 679 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and Intercept Routing–DND.
  • Page 680 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing Intercept No Answer Time Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension.
  • Page 681 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References None Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode. When this setting is set to "0", the system timer is used. Value Range 0–240 s Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 682 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CLIP ID Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when making a trunk call.
  • Page 683 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) CLIR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a public network trunk call. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 684 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 685 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Ring Pattern Table Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the extension. Value Range 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO 4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone 4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Feature Guide References...
  • Page 686 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.12.1 Call Transfer ARS Itemised Code Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made from the extension for accounting and billing purposes. Value Range Max.
  • Page 687 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions. Value Range Off: No notification BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker...
  • Page 688 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.3.3 Call Waiting Pickup Dial Set Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature. The number specified in Pickup Dial No. on this screen is dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active. Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 689 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.5 Data Line Security Option 3 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max.

  • Page 690: Call Pickup Deny

    6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References None Call Pickup Deny Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions. Value Range Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your extension Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your extension Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 691 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.19.2 Absent Message Charge Limit Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the extension. When this limit is reached, the extension cannot be used to make further trunk calls.
  • Page 692 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Option 4 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name...
  • Page 693 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing Incoming Preferred Line Selects the line on which an incoming call is answered after going off-hook. Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here, a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will be answered when going off-hook.
  • Page 694 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone LCS Recording Mode Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the extension’s mailbox when the extension user answers a call that was being monitored. Value Range Stop Record, Keep Record Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings...

  • Page 695: Display Language

    6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 696 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Incoming Call Display Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the extension’s display. Value Range Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DDI/DID Name Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 697 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References None Automatic Answer for CO Call Enables the extension to answer an incoming trunk call automatically after a certain number of rings without going off-hook, when Hands-free Answerback has been set on the extension. This setting is only effective when Forced Automatic Answer on this screen has been set to Off.
  • Page 698 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Forced Automatic Answer Specifies whether the extension automatically answers all incoming calls (both intercom and trunk calls) without going off-hook, regardless of the Hands-free Answerback setting. Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 699: Paging Deny

    6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings ICM Tone Selects the ring tone for incoming calls arriving at the INTERCOM button or PDN buttons. Note that the ring tone specified here is applied to all PDN buttons on an extension. Value Range KX-DT300 series (except KX-DT321)/KX-T7600 series (except KX-T7665)/IP-PT (except KX-NT265/ KX-NT321): 1–30 KX-DT321/KX-T7665/KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.)
  • Page 700 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.16.1 Paging Option 7 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 701 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Character Input Mode Selects the character table to be used for entering characters. Value Range Table 1: Standard mode Table 2: Option mode Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash Mode during CO Conversation...
  • Page 702 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.2 Incoming Call Log Outgoing Call Log Memory Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialled by the extension that are retained in the extension’s Outgoing Call Log memory. Value Range 1–100 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 703 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Option 8 Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name...

  • Page 704: Slt Mw Mode (Kx-Tde Series Only)

    6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension Caller ID Sending Enables the extension to send Caller ID information to an SLT. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 705 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Value Range Disable, MW-Lamp Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.19.1 Message Waiting Wrap-up Timer Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before an extension will accept another call when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group.
  • Page 706 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 707 Value Range Disable, Basic Only, Enable Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600)—Port Number— Built-in Communication Assistant Server Feature Guide References 1.32.3 CA (Communication Assistant) FWD / DND Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each extension can be referred.
  • Page 708 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None FWD Mode for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding type of incoming trunk calls (reference only). Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 709 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD Destination for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls (reference only). Value Range Max.
  • Page 710 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Keep ring after FWD NA to CO Specifies whether an extension continues to ring after forwarding an incoming call to an outside destination via FWD N/A or FWD Busy N/A. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND...

  • Page 711: 4-1-1] Wired Extension-Extension Settings-Clip Generate

    6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate 6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings— CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.
  • Page 712 6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Value Range 0–5 Maintenance Console Location 6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Parameter—Head of ID Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers. Value Range Max.
  • Page 713 6.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 714: 4-1-2] Wired Extension-Fwd/Dnd

    6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND 6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy the FWD/DND settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to.

  • Page 715: 4-1-3] Wired Extension-Speed Dial

    6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial 6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial Personal Speed Dialling allows extension users to dial frequently dialled numbers using two-digit speed dialling numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100 Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed for each extension.

  • Page 716: 4-1-4] Wired Extension-Flexible Button

    6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy Feature Guide References None Parameter Selection (for Single CO) Specifies the trunk to be accessed. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–128 For KX-TDE600: 1–640 PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 717 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Group CO) Specifies the trunk group to be accessed. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–64 For KX-TDE600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References...
  • Page 718 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 1.13.2 Call Park Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out) Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to are logged in to or logged out from. Value Range None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually. All: All incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to.
  • Page 719 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) 1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual) Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button...
  • Page 720 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Extension Number (for DSS) Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 721 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk calls are forwarded.
  • Page 722 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which intercom calls are forwarded. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 723 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out Extension Number (for Hurry-up) Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection). Value Range Max.
  • Page 724 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer) Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF/DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
  • Page 725 Feature Guide References None Dial (for One-touch) Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 (with the KX-NCP500/ KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 5000 (with the KX-TDE600) One-touch Dialling buttons for extensions and DSS Consoles. Value Range Max.
  • Page 726 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Dial (for NDSS) Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station Selection.
  • Page 727 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button...
  • Page 728 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Value Range 0–99 Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.13.2 Call Park Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch Two-way Transfer.
  • Page 729 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Type Feature Guide References None Extension Number This parameter is equivalent to Extension Number on the Key Setting screen. Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting →...
  • Page 730 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Feature Guide References None Parameter 1 This parameter is equivalent to Parameter Selection on the Key Setting screen. Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting →...
  • Page 731 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer) Feature Guide References None Label Specifies the label that will be printed next to the corresponding button. Value Range Max.

  • Page 732: Font Size

    6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Colour of Background Specifies the colour used for the label background for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a colour. Value Range Any colour Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None...
  • Page 733 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 734: 4-1-4] Wired Extension-Flexible Button-Flexible Button Data Copy

    6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy 6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings (including key label settings) of an extension can be copied to different extensions. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple extensions can be selected.

  • Page 735: 4-1-5] Wired Extension-Pf Button

    6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button 6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customised to access a certain feature with one touch. A maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.

  • Page 736: 4-1-6] Wired Extension-Ndss Link Data - Send

    6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send 6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1) Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension.

  • Page 737: 4-1-7] Wired Extension-Simplified Voice Message

    For more information on Simplified Voice Message, see "1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)" in the Feature Guide. Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message...
  • Page 738 6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension Number Indicates the extension number (reference only). Value Range Max.
  • Page 739 6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message Feature Guide References None Simplified Voice Message Selects which card (MPR or ESVM) to use to store and play back greetings and messages for the extension. Each extension must be assigned to a specific card and block within the card, and can only use the assigned card/block.

  • Page 740: 4-2-1] Portable Station-Extension Settings

    6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000), 128 (with the KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), or 512 (with the KX-TDE600) PSs can be programmed. To copy the settings of an extension to another extension, click Copy to. The copied data includes FWD/DND and flexible button settings.
  • Page 741 None User Group Specifies the extension user group to which the PS belongs. The extension user group is used to compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–32 For KX-TDE600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings...
  • Page 742 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Extension PIN Specifies the PIN of the PS. CAUTION There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
  • Page 743 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No. Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—...
  • Page 744 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls when the extension is busy. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 745 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Guide References None Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the length of time until an unanswered call is redirected to the intercept routing destination in each time mode.
  • Page 746 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Guide References None CLIP ID Specifies the CLIP number sent to the public network to show on the called party’s telephone display when making a trunk call.
  • Page 747 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO— Subscriber Number 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Subscriber Number 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—ISDN CLIP— CLIP ID Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) CLIR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party’s telephone when making a public network trunk call.
  • Page 748 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Option 1 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No.
  • Page 749 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO 4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone 4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Feature Guide References 1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection Programmed Mailbox No. Specifies the mailbox number of the PS’s mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration.
  • Page 750 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings ARS Itemised Code Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying the calls made from the PS for accounting and billing purposes. Value Range Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 751 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Guide References None Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions. Value Range Off: No notification BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings...
  • Page 752 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start Feature Guide References 1.6.1.7 Hot Line Pickup Dial No.
  • Page 753 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Guide References None Call Pickup Deny Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions.
  • Page 754 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.8.2 Executive Busy Override Absent Message Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be customised for each PS.
  • Page 755 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Option 4 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No.
  • Page 756 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 1.5.5.2 Line Preference—Outgoing Incoming Preferred Line Selects the line on which an incoming call is answered after going off-hook. Note that even if a specific PDN button is selected here, a call ringing at any PDN button on the extension will be answered when going off-hook.
  • Page 757 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.8.4.2 Call Waiting Tone LCS Recording Mode Specifies whether to continue or stop recording the message in the PS’s mailbox when the PS user answers a call that was being monitored. Value Range Stop Record, Keep Record Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings...
  • Page 758 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Guide References None Display Language Selects the display language of the PS. Value Range Language1–Language5 Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 759 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 760 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Guide References None Flexible Button Programming Mode Specifies whether the PS user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation, or only the One-touch Dialling buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2" before the number when customising a One-touch Dialling button.
  • Page 761 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Option 7 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No.
  • Page 762 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash Mode during CO Conversation Selects the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a trunk conversation. Value Range EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 763 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Value Range 1–100 Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial ISDN Bearer Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending on the type of the PS.
  • Page 764 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension Name Feature Guide References None Group CW w/o Tone (Ring after Call) Enables an incoming call to an incoming call distribution group to arrive at a previously busy extension at the...
  • Page 765 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 5.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List— Wrap-up Timer 5.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Wrap-up Timer based on Feature Guide References 1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out Option 9 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only).
  • Page 766 Value Range Disable, Basic Only, Enable Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600)—Port Number— Built-in Communication Assistant Server Feature Guide References 1.32.3 CA (Communication Assistant) FWD / DND Reference Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings for each PS can be referred.
  • Page 767 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station— Extension No. Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 3.61 [1-2] Portable Station—...
  • Page 768 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings FWD Destination for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls (reference only). Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND...
  • Page 769 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD No Answer Time Specifies the length of time that an incoming call rings at the PS before the call is forwarded. Value Range 0–120 s Maintenance Console Location 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND...

  • Page 770: 4-2-1] Portable Station-Extension Settings-Clip Generate

    6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate 6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings— CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.
  • Page 771 6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Value Range 0–4 Maintenance Console Location 6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Parameter—Head of ID Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers. Value Range Max.
  • Page 772 6.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 773: 4-2-2] Portable Station-Fwd/Dnd

    6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND 6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list. To copy FWD/DND values from one location to another, click Copy to.

  • Page 774: 4-2-3] Portable Station-Flexible Button

    6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy Feature Guide References None Parameter Selection (for Single CO) Specifies the trunk to be accessed. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–128 For KX-TDE600: 1–640 Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References...
  • Page 775 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Group CO) Specifies the trunk group to be accessed. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–64 For KX-TDE600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References...
  • Page 776 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button All: All incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to. Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out Parameter Selection (for Time Service) Selects which time modes are switched manually.
  • Page 777 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button 1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual) Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button...
  • Page 778 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension Number (for ICD Group) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed. Value Range Max.
  • Page 779 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk calls are forwarded. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 780 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from. Value Range Max.
  • Page 781 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox. Value Range Max.
  • Page 782 Feature Guide References None Dial (for One-touch) Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 500 (with the KX-NCP500/ KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 1000 (with the KX-TDE600) One-touch Dialling buttons for PSs. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash])
  • Page 783 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling Dial (for ISDN Service) Specifies the number required to access the telephone company’s ISDN service. Value Range Max.
  • Page 784 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button...
  • Page 785 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Display Option—Key Setting & Key Label Name Type This parameter is equivalent to Type on the Key Setting screen. Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References...
  • Page 786 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Feature Guide References None Dial This parameter is equivalent to Dial on the Key Setting screen. Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting → Dial (for One-touch) →...
  • Page 787 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Maintenance Console Location 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting → Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) → Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park) Feature Guide References None Mailbox Number...

  • Page 788: 4-2-3] Portable Station-Flexible Button-Flexible Button Data Copy

    6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy 6.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the PS that will receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs can be selected. To select all PSs at once, click Select All.

  • Page 789: 4-2-4] Portable Station-Ndss Link Data - Send

    6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send 6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension’s status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1) Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension.

  • Page 790: 4-2-5] Portable Station-Simplified Voice Message

    6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message 6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message The built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be provided for each PS. This screen allows you to specify which extension uses this feature, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each extension.
  • Page 791 6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message Each extension must be assigned to a specific card and block within the card, and can only use the assigned card/block. If two cards are used in the PBX, you should assign a number of extensions to each card, to ensure that the necessary resources, such as message recording space, are available for each extension.

  • Page 792: 4-3] Dss Console

    6.17 [4-3] DSS Console 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT. A maximum of 8 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/ KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 64 (with the KX-TDE600) DSS Consoles can be programmed. The DPT Type —Type of the extension port that DSS Console is connected must be set to DSS in 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port...
  • Page 793 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy Feature Guide References 1.20.2 Flexible Buttons Parameter Selection (for Single CO) Specifies the trunk to be accessed. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–128 For KX-TDE600: 1–640 Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References...
  • Page 794 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Call Park) Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone. Value Range Automatic, Specific Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References...
  • Page 795 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) 1.9.4 Dial Tone Transfer Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual) Specifies the Time Table to be used when the Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console...
  • Page 796 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.4 Time Service Parameter Selection (for SDN) Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button. Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References...
  • Page 797 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension Number (for Message Waiting) Specifies the number of an extension or floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which messages are checked.
  • Page 798 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are forwarded. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 799 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References...
  • Page 800 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox. Value Range Max.
  • Page 801 Feature Guide References None Dial (for One-touch) Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 2000 (with the KX-NCP500/ KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 5000 (with the KX-TDE600) One-touch Dialling buttons for extensions and DSS Consoles. Value Range Max.
  • Page 802 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling Dial (for ISDN Service) Specifies the number required to access the telephone company’s ISDN service. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References...
  • Page 803 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console...
  • Page 804 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Value Range 0–99 Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.13.2 Call Park Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One-touch Two-way Transfer.
  • Page 805 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Type Feature Guide References None Extension Number This parameter is equivalent to Extension Number on the Key Setting screen. Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting →...
  • Page 806 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Feature Guide References None Parameter 1 This parameter is equivalent to Parameter Selection on the Key Setting screen. Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting → Parameter Selection (for Single CO) →...
  • Page 807 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting— Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer) Feature Guide References None Label Specifies the label that will be printed next to the corresponding button. Value Range Max.
  • Page 808 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Colour of Background Specifies the colour used for the label background for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a colour. Value Range Any colour Maintenance Console Location 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Font Size...
  • Page 809 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 810: 4-3] Dss Console-Dss Key Data Copy

    6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy 6.18 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy The flexible DSS button settings (including key label settings) of a DSS Console can be copied to different DSS Consoles. Select the DSS Console that has the setting to copy to other DSS Consoles from the DSS Console No./ Pair Extension list, then click Copy to.

  • Page 811: [5] Optional Device

    Section 7 [5] Optional Device PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 812: 5-1] Doorphone

    7.1 [5-1] Doorphone 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone The settings to establish doorphone calls can be programmed. To assign destinations for doorphone calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). Physical Location—Shelf (KX-TDE600 only) Indicates the shelf to which the doorphone is connected (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 813 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Maintenance Console Location 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call Name Specifies the doorphone name. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the destination number of doorphone calls for each port in each time mode.
  • Page 814 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number for the doorphone port in order to apply the Time Table (day/lunch/break/night). Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Programming Manual References 4.6 [2-4] Week Table Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call...
  • Page 815 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Value Range 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 7.1 [5-1] Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 816: 5-2] External

    7.2 [5-2] External Pager 7.2 [5-2] External Pager Settings for external pagers (external speakers) can be specified. Click Extension List View to view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types (see 2.5.8 Tool— Extension List View). Note For KX-NCP series PBXs, only one pager is supported. Page Number 1, Page Number 2—Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the external pager.

  • Page 817: 5-3-1] Voice Message-Disa System

    7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Direct Inward System Access (DISA) enables outside callers to access specific PBX features as if the caller were using an SLT extension of the PBX. For more information on DISA, see "1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)" in the Feature Guide. Option 1 DISA Security—DISA Security Mode Selects the DISA security mode to prevent unauthorised access to the PBX.
  • Page 818 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Feature Guide References None DISA Intercept—Intercept when destination through DISA sets DND Selects how DISA calls are handled if the destination sets DND, and disables Idle Extension Hunting. Value Range Busy Tone, Enable, Busy Message Maintenance Console Location 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Programming Manual References...
  • Page 819 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Public CO Specifies whether the DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk-to-public trunk call using DISA is established. To enable this setting, " CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO"...
  • Page 820 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Programming Manual References 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network Feature Guide References None CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO Enables trunk-to-public trunk calls to be established using DISA. Value Range Disable: Trunk-to-public trunk calls are established without using DISA.
  • Page 821 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System CO-CO with DISA—Transfer by DTMF "#" (Activation Key Required) Specifies whether an outside party such as a cellular phone can transfer a trunk call to an extension within the PBX by dialling "#" + extension number. Value Range Disable: "#"...
  • Page 822 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Value Range Fixed: The number of times of a tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) that the PBX receives is fixed to 4 times in the ranges of: = 100–1300 ms, 90 ms, 90 ms Option: The tone pattern that the PBX receives is optional as specified in DISA Cyclic Tone Option on this screen.
  • Page 823 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System DISA Cyclic Tone Option—Tone Off Maximum Time Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a cyclic tone to be sent from the telephone company before recognising it as a tone-off. When no tone is detected within the time set here, the PBX recognises it as a tone-off.
  • Page 824 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Maintenance Console Location 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Programming Manual References 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 1.28.4 Timed Reminder Recording Mode Specifies the sound quality of messages recorded on the ESVM card when using it as an MSG card. Increasing the recording quality reduces the total length of recording time available on the card.

  • Page 825: 5-3-2] Voice Message-Disa Message

    7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Outgoing messages (OGM) for DISA calls can be specified. A maximum of 64 OGMs can be programmed. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 2.5.8 Tool— Extension List View).
  • Page 826 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Busy / DND Message No.
  • Page 827 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 1.17.8 Automatic Fax Transfer PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 828: 5-3-3] Voice Message-Svm

    7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM 7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Settings related to Built-in Simplified Voice Message feature can be specified. This feature can be accessed via the MPR card or ESVM card. SVM Card No.1, 2—Slot Number Indicates the slot position (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 829: Remote Access

    7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Maintenance Console Location 7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Recording Mode Specifies the sound quality of messages recorded by the SVM feature. Increasing the recording quality reduces the total length of recording time available with this feature.
  • Page 830 7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Feature Guide References 1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) SVM Cyclic Tone Detection Selects the cyclic tone detection mode. Cyclic tone detection is used to determine the end of a call when an extension user records a greeting message or callers leave voice messages in a message box. To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below: Change this setting.
  • Page 831 7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References 1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Tone Off Maximum Time Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a cyclic tone to be sent from the telephone company before recognising it as a tone-off.
  • Page 832 7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Feature Guide References 1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 833: 5-4] External Relay

    7.6 [5-4] External Relay 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Settings related to external relays can be programmed. External Relay No. Indicates the number of the external relay (reference only). Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–16 For KX-TDE600: 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 7.6 [5-4] External Relay...
  • Page 834 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Value Range Slot and sub-slot number Maintenance Console Location 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.10 External Relay Control Physical Location—Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Programming Manual References...
  • Page 835 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Feature Guide References 1.17.10 External Relay Control Relay Activate Time Specifies the length of time that the relay stays on when activated. Value Range 1–7 s Maintenance Console Location 7.6 [5-4] External Relay Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.10 External Relay Control...

  • Page 836: 5-5] External Sensor

    To assign destinations for sensor calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). External Sensor No. Indicates the number of the external sensor (reference only). Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–16 For KX-TDE600: 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 7.7 [5-5] External Sensor...
  • Page 837 7.7 [5-5] External Sensor Value Range Slot and sub-slot number Maintenance Console Location 7.7 [5-5] External Sensor Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.9 External Sensor Physical Location—Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 7.7 [5-5] External Sensor Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 838 1.17.9 External Sensor Tenant No. Specifies the tenant to which the sensor belongs, to determine the Time Table for the sensor. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.) Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 7.7 [5-5] External Sensor...

  • Page 839: [6] Feature

    Section 8 [6] Feature PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 840: 6-1] System Speed Dial

    Selects the System Speed Dialling Table to be programmed. Whether a tenant uses the basic System Speed Dialling Table or the additional table depends on the setting of System Speed Dial in 8.6 [6-6] Tenant. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Basic Memory: the standard table Expansion for Tenant 1–8: additional tables For KX-TDE600: Basic Memory: the standard table Expansion for Tenant 1–32: additional tables...

  • Page 841: Co Line Access Number + Telephone Number

    8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System 1.18.1 Caller ID CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number Specifies the telephone number (including the Trunk Access number) or feature number assigned to the System Speed Dialling number. Value Range Max.

  • Page 842: 6-2] Hotel & Charge

    8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Various settings related to the hospitality features of the PBX can be set. Main Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4 Specifies the numbers of the extensions designated as hotel operators. Value Range 100–699 Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel &...
  • Page 843 Bill Checkout Billing—Billing for Guest Activates call billing features for the PBX. Value Range OFF, ON Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 844 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing—LCD for "Telephone" Specifies the name of charge item 1 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering room charges. Value Range Max.
  • Page 845 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Telephone" Specifies the name of charge item 1 as printed on the guest bill. Value Range Max.
  • Page 846 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Others" Specifies the name of charge item 3 as printed on the guest bill. Value Range Max. 12 characters Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room SMDR for External Hotel Application—Language for Bill (SMDR)
  • Page 847 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room SMDR for External Hotel Application—Footer 1–3 Specifies the text printed at the bottom of the guest bill. Value Range Max. 80 characters Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 848 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Minibar" (%) Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest charges for charge item 2. Value Range 0.00–99.99 % Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 849: Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point

    8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point Specifies the number of digits to display after the decimal point for the currency in use. Value Range 0–6 Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—...

  • Page 850: Charge Options—Action At Charge Limit

    8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Maintenance Console Location 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Charge Limit 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Budget Management Feature Guide References 1.26.3 Call Charge Services Charge Options—Action at Charge Limit Selects what happens when the amount of the call charge reaches the preprogrammed limit during a...
  • Page 851 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 1.26.3 Call Charge Services PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 852: 6-3] Verification Code

    8.3 [6-3] Verification Code 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code A verification code is used to override the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) of the extension in use to make a certain trunk call, or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes. A maximum of 1000 verification codes can be programmed with other related parameters.

  • Page 853: Itemised Billing Code For Ars

    8.3 [6-3] Verification Code The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX. To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend: Keeping PINs secret. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed. Changing PINs frequently.

  • Page 854: Budget Management

    8.3 [6-3] Verification Code Programming Manual References 10.6 [8-5] Carrier Feature Guide References 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Budget Management Specifies the limit of the call charge that will be counted on the verification code. The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—...

  • Page 855: 6-4] Second Dial Tone

    8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone 8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone A programmed Pause time can be inserted automatically between the Second Dial Tone Waiting code and the following digits. When a programmed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk, a preprogrammed number of pauses are inserted after the code.

  • Page 856: 6-5] Absent Message

    8.5 [6-5] Absent Message 8.5 [6-5] Absent Message When a display PT user calls an extension, a message is shown on the caller’s telephone display describing the reason for absence. A maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed, and any extension user can select one of them.

  • Page 857: 6-6] Tenant

    8.6 [6-6] Tenant 8.6 [6-6] Tenant A maximum of 8 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 32 (with the KX-TDE600) tenants can share the PBX. Each tenant is composed of specified extension user groups. The PBX offers each tenant its own Time Table and system resources.

  • Page 858: System Speed Dial

    8.6 [6-6] Tenant 2.2.5 Operator Features ARS Mode Specifies the ARS mode used when making a trunk call. Value Range Off: ARS is disabled. On for Local Access Operation: ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Idle Line Access method.

  • Page 859: [7] Trs

    Section 9 [7] TRS PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 860: 7-1] Denied Code

    9.1 [7-1] Denied Code 9.1 [7-1] Denied Code Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are allowed).

  • Page 861: 7-2] Exception Code

    9.2 [7-2] Exception Code 9.2 [7-2] Exception Code Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are allowed).

  • Page 862: 7-3] Special Carrier

    If a Special Carrier Access Code is found in the dialled number, TRS/Barring will look only at the following digits. A maximum of 20 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 100 (with the KX-TDE600) Special Carrier Access Codes can be programmed. With the KX-TDE600, 20 codes are displayed at a time.

  • Page 863: 7-4] Emergency Dial

    9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial 9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial Any extension user can dial the programmed emergency numbers at any time after seizing a trunk. The restrictions imposed on the extension, such as Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring), Account Code— Forced mode, and Extension Dial Lock are disregarded. A maximum of 10 emergency numbers can be programmed.

  • Page 864: 7-5] Miscellaneous

    9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. The following optional settings can be programmed to activate a TRS/Barring check, override TRS/Barring, or switch between TRS/Barring methods. TRS Override by System Speed Dialling Enables an outgoing trunk call to override TRS/Barring when the call is made using System Speed Dialling.
  • Page 865 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous Keep: The TRS/Barring check is performed when the timer expires. Maintenance Console Location 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous Programming Manual References 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits Specifies a limit to be placed on the number of digits which can be dialled after an extension user receives a trunk call.
  • Page 866 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous Feature Guide References 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) 1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) TRS Table Mode for Level N (N=2_6) Selects the method of TRS/Barring to be used for restricting calls. The level of TRS/Barring is determined by the telephone codes set in the Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables.

  • Page 867: 10 [8] Ars

    Section 10 [8] ARS PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 868: 8-1] System Setting

    10.1 [8-1] System Setting 10.1 [8-1] System Setting Automatic Route Selection (ARS) automatically selects the appropriate carrier at the time a trunk call is made, according to the programmed settings. The user-dialled number will be checked and modified in order to connect it to the appropriate carrier.

  • Page 869: 8-2] Leading Number

    10.2 [8-2] Leading Number 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number Specifies the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading numbers that will be routed by the ARS feature. A maximum of 1000 different leading numbers can be programmed, and each leading number can select a Routing Plan Table number, which determines the ARS procedure.
  • Page 870 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number Routing Plan Number Specifies the Routing Plan Table number used for each leading number. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–16 For KX-TDE600: 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

  • Page 871: 8-3] Routing Plan Time

    The start and end times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks are shown for each day of the week. There are 16 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 48 (with the KX-TDE600) Routing Plan Tables, and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list.

  • Page 872: 8-3] Routing Plan Time-Time Setting

    10.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting 10.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting The start times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Routing Plan. Each time block automatically ends when the subsequent block begins. Time-A–D—Setting Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.

  • Page 873: 8-4] Routing Plan Priority

    Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list. Select the desired day of the week by clicking the applicable tab. Time-A–Time-D Specifies the carrier to be given priority for each time zone. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: None, 1–10 For KX-TDE600: None, 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 10.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority...

  • Page 874: 8-5] Carrier

    It is possible to specify how user-dialled numbers are modified for connecting to the appropriate carrier. A maximum of 10 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 48 (with the KX-TDE600) different carriers can be programmed to be used with the ARS feature.
  • Page 875 10.6 [8-5] Carrier Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) TRG 01–TRG 64 (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/TRG 01–TRG 96 (for KX-TDE600) Selects the trunk groups that connect to the carrier. TRG 01–TRG 64 (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/TRG 01–TRG 96 (for KX-TDE600) Enables each trunk group for each carrier.
  • Page 876 Authorisation Code for Tenant—Tenant 1–Tenant 32 Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each tenant. Note For the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200, only up to 8 tenants are available. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 10.6 [8-5] Carrier...

  • Page 877: 8-6] Leading Number Exception

    10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception 10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception Specifies telephone numbers that will not be connected using the ARS feature. When the user-dialled number includes a leading number exception, the PBX sends the number to a trunk by the Idle Line Access method if ARS Mode in 10.1 [8-1] System Setting is "on".

  • Page 878: 8-7] Authorisation Code For Trg

    10.6 [8-5] Carrier. 8 trunk groups are displayed on the screen at a time. To display other groups, click the applicable tab. Authorisation Code for Trunk Group—TRG 01–TRG 64 (for KX-NCP500/ KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/TRG 01–TRG 96 (for KX-TDE600) Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each trunk group.

  • Page 879: 11 [9] Private Network

    Section 11 [9] Private Network PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 880: 9-1] Tie Table

    11.1 [9-1] TIE Table 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations. A maximum of 32 TIE Line Routing and Modification Tables can be programmed. It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network in order to identify the trunk route to be used when an extension makes or receives a TIE line call.
  • Page 881 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.30.1 TIE Line Service Removed Number of Digits Specifies the number of leading digits of the dialled number to be removed for each priority. Value Range 0–15 Maintenance Console Location 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 882 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: None, 1–64 For KX-TDE600: None, 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.30.1 TIE Line Service Enhanced QSIG Leading Number Specifies the leading number for other PBX extension numbers or the PBX code of other PBXs in the TIE line network.
  • Page 883 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Maintenance Console Location 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.30.5 QSIG Enhanced Features PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 884: 9-2] Network Data Transmission

    11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Settings related to the transmission of extension BLF (Busy Line Field) data or Message Waiting notifications over a network of PBXs can be programmed. Extension BLF data is used to show the status of a monitored extension attached to another PBX on a Network DSS (NDSS) button.
  • Page 885 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Feature Guide References 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data Transmission ISDN->VoIP Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from an ISDN port through any VoIP ports that are set to transmit BLF data.
  • Page 886 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Value Range 100 ´ n (n=0–30) ms Maintenance Console Location 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times re-transmission of network message waiting notifications is repeated before being cancelled.
  • Page 887 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required) Feature Guide References 1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 888: 9-3] Network Operator (Voip)

    Specifies the slot number (with the KX-TDE600, shelf and slot number) of the card used to send extension status data. This setting is only required when using VoIP to transmit data. Value Range For KX-NCP500: Undefined, 1–3, V-1–V-2 For KX-NCP1000: Undefined, 1–4, V-1–V-4...
  • Page 889 11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP) Programming Manual References 3.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 890: 9-4] Ndss Key Table

    11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table Extensions at up to 7 other PBXs that will be monitored using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) can be registered. A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered. To create an NDSS button to monitor an extension, the extension must be registered here first.
  • Page 891 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table Network PBX ID of Network Extension to be monitored Indicates the Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID of the PBX that the extension is connected to (reference only). Value Range None, 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table Programming Manual References...
  • Page 892 11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 893: 10] Co & Incoming Call

    Section 12 [10] CO & Incoming Call PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 894: 10-1] Co Line Settings

    12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Trunks can be assigned a name, and grouped into a maximum of 64 (with the KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/ KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 96 (with the KX-TDE600) trunk groups. For KX-TDE600, all supported cards are displayed in the Select Shelf & Slot list. Select the shelf and slot and card type to programme, or select "All"...

  • Page 895: Co Name

    12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Card Type Indicates the type of card to which the trunk is connected (reference only). Value Range Card type Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 896 Trunk Group Number Specifies the trunk group number to which the trunk belongs. When a V-IPGW card is installed, the value is automatically set to "7" for the corresponding trunks. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–64 For KX-TDE600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings...

  • Page 897: 10-2] Dil Table & Port Settings

    To assign DIL destination numbers, enter directly or click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings...
  • Page 898 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Card Type...
  • Page 899 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 1.30.1 TIE Line Service 1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN) Distribution Method Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls.
  • Page 900 1.30.1 TIE Line Service Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings...
  • Page 901 System Speed Dialling Table. CLI distribution can be enabled or disabled for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) on a trunk basis. Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table &...
  • Page 902 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Card Type Indicates the trunk card type (reference only). Value Range Card type Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table &...
  • Page 903 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Feature Guide References 1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 1.30.1 TIE Line Service 1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN) Distribution Method Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk.
  • Page 904 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Shelf Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 905 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Card Type Indicates the trunk card type (reference only). Value Range Card type Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY...

  • Page 906: Ddi/Did/Tie/Msn—Remove Digit

    12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Value Range DIL: Distribution depends on the trunk through which the calls arrive DDI/DID: Distribution depends on the DDI/DID number of the calls MSN: Distribution depends on the MSN of the calls Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table &...
  • Page 907 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Maintenance Console Location 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service 1.30.1 TIE Line Service PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 908: 10-3] Ddi / Did Table

    12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table Incoming trunk calls with DDI/DID numbers can be distributed to specific destinations. Each DDI/DID number has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). When CLI distribution is enabled for a DDI/DID number, incoming trunk calls with that DDI/DID number will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DDI/DID destinations) if the caller’s identification number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table, which is used as the Caller ID Table.
  • Page 909 1.30.1 TIE Line Service Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table Programming Manual References 4.6 [2-4] Week Table...
  • Page 910 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table VM Trunk Group No. Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the DID destination is the floating extension number of a VM (DPT) Group. The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller. Value Range 1–48 Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 911: 10-3] Ddi/Did Table-Automatic Registration

    12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration 12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration Automatic Registration allows DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode (day/lunch/ break/night) to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed. Value Range 1–1000 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 912 12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration Maintenance Console Location 12.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration Programming Manual References 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the number of the DDI/DID destination in each time mode for the first location to be programmed. If the same destination is to be used for all locations for a certain time mode, click the appropriate Same all check box.

  • Page 913: 10-3] Ddi/Did Table-Name Generate

    12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate 12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate Name Generate allows DDI/DID names to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. If a name generated here is longer than 20 characters, the additional characters will be discarded. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
  • Page 914 12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate Maintenance Console Location 12.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate Programming Manual References 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) Name Prefix Specifies the text to be included at the start of each DDI/DID name. Value Range Max.

  • Page 915: 10-4] Msn Table

    12.6 [10-4] MSN Table 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Incoming ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line calls with Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSNs) can be distributed to a certain destination. Each MSN has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/ break/night). A maximum of 10 MSNs can be programmed for each ISDN-BRI port. To use this feature, Access Mode in 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port must be set to P-MP.
  • Page 916 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Port Indicates the port number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None MSN Number Specifies the MSN.
  • Page 917 1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day. Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: 1–8 For KX-TDE600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table...
  • Page 918 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table The VM trunk group number is used to allow the VPS to send the applicable greeting message to the caller. Value Range 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Programming Manual References 3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service CLI for MSN...
  • Page 919 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Maintenance Console Location 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table Programming Manual References...

  • Page 920: 10-5] Miscellaneous

    12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous 12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous The Intercept Routing feature can activate when the destination of an incoming call is unavailable, or when there is no destination for the call, to reroute the call to an alternate destination. Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND.) Enables the Intercept Routing—DND feature to activate when the original destination is in DND mode.
  • Page 921 12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous Intercept—Intercept Routing for Extension Call Enables the Intercept Routing feature to operate for extension calls. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 922 12.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 923: 11] Maintenance

    Section 13 [11] Maintenance PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 924: 11-1] Main

    13.1 [11-1] Main 13.1 [11-1] Main SMDR Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed information about incoming and outgoing calls. SMDR Format—Type Selects the format of SMDR output. Value Range Type A: 80 digits without call charge information Type B: 80 digits with call charge information Type C: 120 digits Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main...
  • Page 925 13.1 [11-1] Main Value Range 4–99 Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Format—Blank Footer Length (Number of Lines) Specifies the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page. The number of lines for the skip perforation should be shorter than the page length.
  • Page 926 13.1 [11-1] Main Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Format—Time Format (12H / 24H) Selects whether times are displayed using the 12- or 24-hour format. Value Range 12H, 24H Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
  • Page 927 13.1 [11-1] Main Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Print Information—Intercom Call Specifies whether the dialled digits of outgoing intercom calls are printed. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References...
  • Page 928 13.1 [11-1] Main Print Information—Hotel Room Status Selects whether check-in and check-out data is output on SMDR. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 1.27.2 Room Status Control Print Information—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call) Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR.
  • Page 929 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 2.4.3 Local Alarm Information SMDR Options Option—ARS Dial Selects the type of the dialled number to be printed for a call with the ARS feature. Value Range Dial before ARS Modification: The user-dialled number Dial after ARS Modification: The ARS modified number...
  • Page 930 13.1 [11-1] Main Option—DDI/DID Number & Name Selects the printing format of incoming trunk calls with a DDI/DID number. Value Range None, Number, Name, Name + Number Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Option—Secret Dial Selects the printing format of calls with a secret dial.
  • Page 931 13.1 [11-1] Main Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— Print Information—Outgoing Call Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Option—Condition Code "RC" Specifies whether the time of receiving an incoming trunk call is printed. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 932 13.1 [11-1] Main Option—Caller ID Modification Specifies whether Caller ID numbers are recorded on SMDR as received (before being modified by the PBX) or after being modified. Value Range Before Modification, After Modification Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References 5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
  • Page 933 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) LAN—New Line Code for Telnet Specifies the new line code for a terminal emulator. If the terminal emulator automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select CR (Carriage Return). If not, select CR + LF (Line Feed).
  • Page 934 13.1 [11-1] Main Communication—NL Code Specifies the NL (New Line) code for the printer or personal computer. If the printer or personal computer automatically feeds lines with a carriage return, select CR (Carriage Return). If not, select CR + LF (Line Feed). Value Range CR + LF, CR Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 935 13.1 [11-1] Main • Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: Space, Stop Bit: 2 bit Value Range 7 bit, 8 bit Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Communication—Flow Enables the hardware flow control.
  • Page 936 13.1 [11-1] Main Feature Guide References 1.26.1.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) External Modem Command—Automatic Initialisation Specifies the command to automatically initialise an external modem when it is plugged into the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port of the PBX. Value Range Max.
  • Page 937 13.1 [11-1] Main Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.4.3 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time—Set Enables the daily self check of the PBX for local alarm and error log. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 938 13.1 [11-1] Main Feature Guide References 2.4.3 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time—Minute Specifies the minute of the PBX daily self check start time. Value Range 0–59 Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.4.3 Local Alarm Information Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Counter) Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if network message waiting information is deleted after...
  • Page 939 13.1 [11-1] Main Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Activation Key Required) Feature Guide References 1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail Syslog Syslog Enables the PBX to output local alarm information to a syslog server. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 940: Remote—Analogue Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number

    13.1 [11-1] Main Feature Guide References 1.26.1.2 Syslog Record Management Syslog—Major Selects whether to output major alarm information to a syslog server. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1.2 Syslog Record Management Syslog—Minor Selects whether to output minor alarm information to a syslog server.

  • Page 941: Remote—Isdn Remote Floating Extension Number

    13.1 [11-1] Main Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.3.1 PC Programming Remote—ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number for ISDN remote maintenance. To enable this setting, Remote— Remote Programming on this screen must be enabled. Value Range Max.

  • Page 942: System Password - Pt Programming—Prog ** : User Level

    13.1 [11-1] Main Remote—Password Lock Counter for Remote Programming Specifies the number of successive incorrect password entries allowed before remote access is locked. Value Range None, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.3.1 PC Programming Remote—Remote Maintenance Dial Number (Own Telephone number for reference)

  • Page 943: System Password - Pt Programming—Prog *# : Administrator Level

    13.1 [11-1] Main Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.3.2 PT Programming System Password - PT Programming—Prog *# : Administrator Level Specifies the administrator level system password to authorise the PT user to access all system programming. Value Range 4–10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 944 13.1 [11-1] Main System Password - PC Programming—User Level Specifies the system password used to access Maintenance Console at User Level. This password can only be set in Interactive mode. Value Range 4–10 characters Maintenance Console Location 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 945 13.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.3.1 PC Programming PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 946: 11-2] Pt Programming Access

    13.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access 13.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access The programming items accessible at User and Administrator level can be specified. 100 programming item numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.

  • Page 947: 11-3] Power Failure Transfer

    Trunk Card Slot No. Specifies the position of the trunk card to be used. Value Range For KX-NCP500: None, Small Free Slot 1, Small Free Slot 2, Small Free Slot 3 For KX-NCP1000: None, Small Free Slot 1, Small Free Slot 2, Small Free Slot 3, Small Free Slot 4 For KX-TDE series: None, 1–11...
  • Page 948 13.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer Maintenance Console Location 13.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.4.1 Power Failure Transfer PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 949: 11-4-1] Snmp-System Setting

    13.4 [11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting 13.4 [11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting Using SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), it is possible for a PC assigned as an SNMP manager to manage and receive PBX system status information, such as alarm information and general system activity. The related PBX system settings can be programmed.
  • Page 950 13.4 [11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting Maintenance Console Location 13.4 [11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor MIB - SysName Specifies an administrative name for the system. Value Range Max. 255 characters Maintenance Console Location 13.4 [11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting Programming Manual References...

  • Page 951: 11-4-2] Snmp-Manager

    13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager 13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager It is possible to assign up to two PCs as SNMP managers. The settings related to SNMP manager activity can be programmed for each SNMP manager, indicated as No.1 and No.2 on the screen. This option is only available at Installer level.
  • Page 952 13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager Maintenance Console Location 13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor TRAP Cold Start Selects whether the PBX sends Cold Start TRAP to an SNMP manager or not. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 953 13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager TRAP Alarm - Major Selects whether the PBX sends Major Alarm TRAP to an SNMP manager or not. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.4.4 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) System Monitor TRAP Alarm - Minor Selects whether the PBX sends Minor Alarm TRAP to an SNMP manager or not.

  • Page 954: 11-5] Air Synchronisation

    1–32 Maintenance Console Location 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Type (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/Shelf (for KX-TDE600) Indicates the shelf type and/or position (reference only). Value Range For KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: Physical, Virtual For KX-TDE600: Shelf number, Virtual...
  • Page 955 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation Maintenance Console Location 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None...
  • Page 956 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation CS Name Indicates the name of the CS (reference only). Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). To change the status of the port, select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command.
  • Page 957 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CS Class Specifies the classification of each CS. This parameter can only be modified when Connection on this screen is set to OUS. Value Range Sync Master CS1, Sync Master CS2, Sync Slave CS Maintenance Console Location 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References...
  • Page 958 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Primary CS—Port Indicates the port number of the primary CS (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 959 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation Feature Guide References None Secondary CS—Index Specifies the number of the secondary CS. Value Range 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Secondary CS—Slot Indicates the slot position of the secondary CS (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 960 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Secondary CS—CS Name Indicates the name of the secondary CS (reference only). Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 961: Appendix

    Section 14 Appendix PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 962: Revision History

    14.1.1 KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx 14.1 Revision History 14.1.1 KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx New Contents • 2.6.17 Utility—CS Status Monitor • 2.6.19 Utility—File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment—IP-CS/NT400 • 3.1 [1-1] Slot To access IP-PT port properties •...
  • Page 963 14.1.1 KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx • 4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM— BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold • 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone → Dial—Extension First Digit → Dial—Extension Inter-digit •...

  • Page 964: Kx-Ncp500/Kx-Ncp1000 Pbmpr Software File Version 4.1Xxx

    5.27 [3-10] Conference Group Changed Contents • 3.1 [1-1] Slot Maximum number of cards • 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600)—VoIP-DSP Option— IP Extension Count of BGM • 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings •...
  • Page 965 14.1.2 KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 4.1xxx PDF Output • 13.6 [11-5] Air Synchronisation PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 966: Kx-Tde100/Kx-Tde200 Pmmpr Software File Version 2.0Xxx

    14.1.3 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx 14.1.3 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2.0xxx New Contents • 2.2 Programme launcher • 2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Network Loopback Test Changed Contents • 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console • 2.1 Introduction • 2.3 File •...

  • Page 967: Kx-Tde100/Kx-Tde200 Pmmpr Software File Version 2.01Xx

    • 2.2.5 Programme launcher—Connect—LAN • 3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key • 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) • 3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension • 3.57 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port (KX-TDE series only) •...

  • Page 968: Kx-Tde100/Kx-Tde200 Pmmpr Software File Version 3.0Xxx

    14.1.5 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx 14.1.5 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx New Contents • 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console PBX Web Manager • 2.6.17 Utility—CS Status Monitor • 2.6.19 Utility—File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment—IP-CS/NT400 •...
  • Page 969 2.6.15 Utility—CS Information • 2.6.21 Utility—Card Software Timed Update • 3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key • 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) • 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property • 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings •...

  • Page 970: Kx-Tde100/Kx-Tde200 Pmmpr Software File Version 4.1Xxx

    CTI Hold—Forced Idle when Hold by PDN/SDN Key • 5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Centralised VM Unit Setting Changed Contents • 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600)—VoIP-DSP Option— IP Extension Count of BGM • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant—...

  • Page 971: Kx-Tde600 Pgmpr Software File Version 3.0Xxx

    14.1.7 KX-TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx 14.1.7 KX-TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx New Contents • 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console PBX Web Manager • 2.6.17 Utility—CS Status Monitor • 2.6.19 Utility—File Transfer FTP to IP Equipment—IP-CS/NT400 •...
  • Page 972 14.1.7 KX-TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx • 2.6.21 Utility—Card Software Timed Update • 3.3 [1-1] Slot—Activation Key • 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600) • 3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property • 3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings •...

  • Page 973: Kx-Tde600 Pgmpr Software File Version 4.1Xxx

    CTI Hold—Forced Idle when Hold by PDN/SDN Key • 5.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Centralised VM Unit Setting Changed Contents • 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600)—VoIP-DSP Option— IP Extension Count of BGM • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Assistant—...
  • Page 974 14.1.8 KX-TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 4.1xxx PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 975: Feature Programming References

    Feature Programming References PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 976 Feature Programming References Absent Message • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Absent Message Set / Cancel • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Absent Message • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Absent Message • 8.5 [6-5] Absent Message Feature Guide References 1.19.2 Absent Message Account Code Entry •...
  • Page 977 Feature Programming References • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemised Code • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemised Code • 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Itemised Billing Code for ARS • Section 10 [8] ARS • 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—ARS Dial Feature Guide References 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
  • Page 978 Feature Programming References • 6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6— SVM Lock • 6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message • 7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Feature Guide References 1.17.7 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Call Billing for Guest Room •...
  • Page 979 Feature Programming References • 3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, E911, 3PTY • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— ISDN-FWD (MSN) Set / Cancel / Confirm • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO &...
  • Page 980 Feature Programming References Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— ISDN Hold • 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type • 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type • 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type Feature Guide References 1.21.1.6 Call Hold (HOLD)—by ISDN Call Monitor •...
  • Page 981 Feature Programming References – DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for ICD Group Call • 5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call Pickup Deny • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call Pickup Deny Feature Guide References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup Call Transfer...
  • Page 982 Feature Programming References – Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call – Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting – Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings – Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call –...
  • Page 983 Feature Programming References • 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—CLI for DIL— CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night • 12.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table— CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night • 12.6 [10-4] MSN Table— CLI Ring for MSN—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Guide References 1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection...
  • Page 984 Feature Programming References – ISDN CLIP— COLR • 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type • 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation (CNIP/CONP)—by QSIG •...
  • Page 985 Feature Programming References Communication Assistant (CA) • 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600)—Port Number— Built-in Communication Assistant Server • 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CA • 4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 6 (CTI) → Built-in Communication Assistant—System status retry interval timer →...
  • Page 986 – Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold Feature Guide References 1.29.2 Confirmation Tone DHCP • 3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR (for KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000/KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/ IPCEMPR (for KX-TDE600)— DHCP Client Feature Guide References 2.4.5 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Assignment Dial Tone •...
  • Page 987 Feature Programming References 1.29.1 Dial Tone Dial Tone Transfer • 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button – Type – Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) • 6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button – Type – Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) • 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console –...
  • Page 988 Feature Programming References Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) • 3.49 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type (KX-TDE series only) • 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DDI / DID • 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DDI / DID / TIE / MSN –...
  • Page 989 Feature Programming References – Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking • 8.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge—Charge – Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point – Charge Options—Currency – Charge Options—Currency Display Position • 12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings— CO Name Feature Guide References 1.20.4 Display Information Do Not Disturb (DND) •...
  • Page 990 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 1.22.1 E1 Line Service Emergency Call • 9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial Feature Guide References 1.5.4.2 Emergency Call Executive Busy Override • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Executive Override Deny Set / Cancel • 4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Executive Busy Override •...
  • Page 991 Feature Programming References Extension Port Configuration • 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port • 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Pair Extension Feature Guide References 2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration External Feature Access (EFA) • 3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Flash Time •...
  • Page 992 Feature Programming References • 3.50 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port (KX-TDE series only)— Disconnect Time • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation • 6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation •...
  • Page 993 Feature Programming References FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features – FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension – FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO – FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension – Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO &...
  • Page 994 Feature Programming References • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer Feature Guide References 1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution Hands-free Answerback • 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free •...
  • Page 995 Feature Programming References – Pickup Dial Set – Pickup Dial No. • 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2 – Pickup Dial Set – Pickup Dial No. Feature Guide References 1.6.1.7 Hot Line Idle Extension Hunting • 5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group •...
  • Page 996 Feature Programming References • 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command • 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension Inter-digit • 4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode •...
  • Page 997 Feature Programming References Internal Call Block • 4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block— COS Number of the Extension Which Receive the Call from Other Extension 1–64 • 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— • 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— •...
  • Page 998 Feature Programming References Feature Guide References 1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling Last Number Redial • 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone – Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter – Automatic Redial—Repeat Interval – Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration – Automatic Redial—Analogue CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer •...

  • Page 999: Manager Features

    Feature Programming References • 6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type • 13.1 [11-1] Main – SMDR— Print Information—Error Log – Maintenance— Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2 – Maintenance— Daily Test Start Time—Set – Maintenance— Daily Test Start Time—Hour – Maintenance— Daily Test Start Time—Minute Feature Guide References 2.4.3 Local Alarm Information...
  • Page 1000 Feature Programming References 2.2.6 Manager Features Message Waiting • 3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type— SLT Power Supply (KX-TDE series only) • 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back • 4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Message Waiting Set •...

This manual is also suitable for:

Kx-tde600Kx-ncp1000Kx-tde100Kx-tde200Pure ip-pbx

Table of Contents